■ 

.  m:: 

. 


■ 
U   i.   . 

■ 


I 
I 
. 

•      ■  i 

■ 

■    .  ■      ■  ■  ■ 

■ 

■ 
■ 

■ 

...... 


- 


: 


i 


PERKINS  LIBRARY 

I /tike    I  niversity 


Karr   Uooki 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2010  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/riflelightinfant01hard 


/     t./r/ti V 

/.   C.  Limit  t, ■/,;,/ 

.11    It.,,,,- 

<•    it  ''  MlUtt  r 

A  Adjvctant 

.V  M  Strg  '.  >/,,;.  >• 

'  X  Field  Music 

/••//„„,/ 

CaSn ^/»/f  / ■  run/  ./.,.,,■./ 


«     S    a     -Waster  St'?  f 


1 


R'tfltf    Quide 
I  I. lit    l/iltt/e 


II 1  1  1  1  1  1  II  1  1  1  1 

1    1    1    1    1        1    1     |    J    !'    II    [    1    |    ! 

1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1 II 1 1  1  1 

1    1    1   1   f  1.  1   i:  1    1    1  1   1   1   1;  1   1   1    1   IX 

Q  . 

* 
□ 

a 

a 

za 

6 

a 

"l    Platoon. 


st  Platoon 


□  Fvrst  LvevU 

L_l  St^concZ  licizt 

LJ  Thxr-  d  X  tent . 

El  First  Sen  * 

S  Second  Se,i  *■ 

Erj  T}u*'d  Sefl 

IS  Fourth  Serj1 

□  Fifth  Serjt 


RIFLE 


AND 


LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS; 


FOR 


THE  EXERCISE  AND  MANOEUVRES 


OF 


TROOPS   WHEN   ACTING    AS    LIGHT    INFANTRY 
OR    RIFLEMEN. 


PREPARED   UNDER   THE   DIRECTION    OF   THE 
WAR     DEPARTMENT, 
> 


BY 

BREVET  LIEUT.-COL.  W.  J.  HARDEE, 

U.  S.  ARMY. 


VOL.  I. 

SCHOOLS   OP   THE    SOLDIER   AND    COMPANY; 
INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


NASHVILLE,    TENN.  : 

J.    0.    GRIFFITH    &    CO., 

UNION   AND   AMERICAN   OFFICE. 

1861. 


rr>9 


War  Department, 

March  29,  1855. 

The  System  of  Tactics  for  Light  Infantry 
and  Riflemen,  prepared  under  the  direction  of 
the  War  Department  by  Brevet  Lieutenant- 
Colonel  William  J.  Hardee,  of  the  Cavalry, 
having  been  approved  by  the  President,  is 
adopted  for  the  instruction  of  the  troops  when 
acting  as  Light  Infantry  or  Riflemen,  and,  under 
the  Act  of  May  12,  1820,  for  the  observance  of 
the  Militia  when  so  employed. 

Jefferson  Davis, 
Secretary  of  War. 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE    FIRST. 


Article  First. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or 
in  line. 

1.  A  regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies, 
which  will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to 
left,  in  the  following  order :  first,  sixth,  fourth, 
ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seventh,  second, 
according  to  the  rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same 
principle  will  be  observed,  viz. :  the  first  captain 
will  command  the  right  company,  the  second  cap- 
tain the  left  company,  the  third  captain  the  right 
centre  company,  and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  desig- 
nated from  right  to  left,  first  company,  second 
company,  etc.  This  designation  will  be  observed 
in  the  manoeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  what- 
ever their  denomination,  will  form  the  first  divi- 

(5) 


6  FORMATION    OF   THE    BATTALION. 

sion  ;  the  next  two  companies  the  second  divi- 
sion ;   and  so  on,  to  the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two 
equal  parts,  which  will  be  designated  as  the  first 
and  second  platoon,  counting  from  the  right; 
and  each  platoon,  in  like  manner,  will  be  subdi- 
vided into  two  sections. 

G.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regi- 
ment, or  part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or 
more  companies,  will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter 
designated,  will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right 
centre  battalion  company.  That  company,  and 
all  on  its  right,  will  be  denominated  the  right 
wing  of  the  battalion ;  the  remaining  companies 
the  left  icing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks ; 
and  each  company  will  be  formed  into  two  ranks, 
in  the  following  manner :  the  corporals  will  be 
posted  in  thcfront  rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left 
of  platoons,  according  to  height;  the  tallest  cor- 
poral and  the  tallest  man  will  form  the  first  file, 
the  next  two  tallest  men  will  form  the  second  file, 
and  so  on  to  the  last  file,  which  will  be  composed 
of  the  shortest  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one, 
two,  in  the  company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form 
groups  of  four  men,  who  Will  be  designated  com- 
ra</<  s  in  battle. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will 
be  thirteen  inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of 
the  rear  rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of 
the  front  rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  bat- 


FORMATION  OP  THE  BATTALION.      7 

talion  will  always  be  equalized,  by  transferring 
men  from  the  strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 

Posts  of  Company  Officers,  Sergeants  and 
Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  are 
nine  in  number,  and  will  be  posted  in  the  follow- 
ing manner  : 

13.  The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company, 
touching  with  the  left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touch- 
ing with  the  left  elbow,  and  covering  the  captain. 
In  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be  denominated  cover- 
ing sergeant,  or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remainimr  officers  and  sergeants  will 
be  posted  as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  behind 
the  rear  rank. 

16.  The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  fourth  section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  first  platoon. 

18.  The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  second  platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres 
he  will  be  designated  left  guide  of  the  eompany. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second 
fite  from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  bat- 


8      FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

talion,  the  second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the 
front  rank,  and  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front 
rank,  as  prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  re- 
placed— officers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by 
corporals.  The  colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieuten- 
ant from  one  company  to  command  another,  of 
which  both  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant  are 
absent ;  but  this  authority  will  give  no  right  to 
a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel 
and  major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on 
active  service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adju- 
tant, when  the  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  will  be 
on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in 
rear  of  the  file  closers,  and  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  battalion.  This  distance  will  be  reduced 
whenever  there  is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the 
battalion. 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will 
be  opposite  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings 
respectively,  and  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  op- 
posite the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respect- 
ively, and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid 
the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in 
the  manoeuvres. 


FORMATION    OF    THE    BATTALION.  9 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  ma- 
jor. If  all  the  field  officers  be  absent,  the  senior 
captain  will  command  the  battalion  ;  but  if  either 
be  present,  he  will  not  call  the  senior  captain  to 
act  as  field  officer,  except  in  case  of  evident  neces- 
sity. 

82.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other 
staff  officers,  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel, 
and  three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  quarter-master  sergeant,  on  a  line  with 
the  front  rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces 
on  the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks, 
and  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers, 
the  left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  com- 
pany. The  senior  principal  musician  will  be  two 
paces  in  front  of  the  field  music,  and  the  other 
two  paces  in  the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will 
be  drawn  up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to 
its  numbers,  and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the 
field  music,  having  one  of  the  principal  musicians 
at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

36.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be 
composed  of  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left 
of  the  right  centre  company,  of  which  company, 
for  the  time  being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 


10  FORMATION    OF   THE   BATTALION. 

37.  The  Front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  ser- 
geant, to  be  selected  by  t lie  colonel,  who  will  be 
called,  for  the  time,  color-bearer,  with  the  two 
ranking  corporals,  respectively,  on  his  right  and 
left ;  the  rear  rank  will  be  composed  of  the  three 
corporals  next  in  rank  ;  and  the  three  remaining 
corporals  will  be  posted  in  their  rear,  and  on  the 
line  of  file  closers.  The  left  guide  of  the  color- 
company,  when  these  three  last  earned  corporals 
are  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  will  be  immediately 
on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies 
present,  there  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  dis- 
play of  colors,  except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

89.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be 
selected  from  those  most  distinguished  for  regu- 
larity and  precision,  as  well  in  their  positions 
under  arms  as  in  their  marching.  The  latter  ad- 
vantage, and  a  just  carriage  of  the  person,  are  to 
be  more  particularly  sought  for  in  the  selection 
of  the  color-bearer. 

//<  ral  a u ales. 

40.  There  will  he  two  general  guides  in  each 
battalion,  selected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel, 
from  among  the  sergeants  (other  than  first  ser- 
geants)  the  most  distinguished  for  carriage  under 

arms,  and  accuracy  in  marching. 

41.  'I'll  cants  will  be  respectively  denomi- 
nated, in  the  manoeuvres,  righl  general  guide,  and 

left  [i<  n<  ral  guide,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  tile 
closers;  the  first  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the 
second  in  rear  of  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 


instruction  of  the  battalion.       11 

Article  Second. 
Instruction  of  the  Battalion. 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for 
the  instruction  of  his  command.  He  will  assem- 
ble the  officers  together  for  theoretical  and  prac- 
tical instruction  as  often  as  he  may  judge  neces- 
sary, and  when  unable  to  attend  to  this  duty  in 
person,  it  will  be  discharged  by  the  officer  next 
in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the 
theoretical  and  practical  instruction  of  their  non- 
commissioned officers,  and  the  adjutant  for  the  in- 
struction of  the  non-commissioned  staff.  To  this 
end  they  will  require  these  tactics  to  be  studied 
and  recited  lesson  by  lesson;  and  when  instruc- 
tion is  given  on  the  ground,  each  non-commis- 
sioned officer,  as  he  explains  a  movement,  should 
be  required  to  put  it  into  practical  operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also 
be  practiced  in  giving  commands.  Each  com- 
mand, in  a  lesson,  at  the  theoretical  instruction, 
should  first  be  given  by  the  instructor,  and  then 
repeated,  in  succession,  by  the  non-commissioned 
officers,  so  that  while  they  become  habituated  to 
the  commands,  uniformity  may  be  established  in 
the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company 
officers  will  be  the  instructors  of  the  squads  ;  but 
if  there  be  not  a  sufficient  number  of  company 
officers  present,  intelligent  sergeants  may  be  sub- 


12  INSTRUCTION    OF    THE   BATTALION. 

stitutcd  ;  and  two  or  three  squads,  under  sergeant 
instructors,  be  superintended,  at  the  same  time, 
by  an  officer. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be 
the  principal  instructors,  substituting  frequently 
the  captain  of  the  company,  and  sometimes  one 
of  the  lieutenants ;  the  substitute,  as  far  as  prac- 
ticable, being  superintended  by  one  of  the  prin- 
cipals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier 
general  may  constitute  himself  the  principal  in- 
structor, frequently  substituting  the  colonel  of  the 
battalion,  sometimes  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  ma- 
jor, and  twice  or  thrice,  in  the  same  course  of  in- 
struction, each  of  the  three  senior  captains.  In 
this  school,  also,  the  substitute  will  always,  if 
practicable,  be  superintended  by  the  brigadier 
general  or  the  colonel,  or  (in  case  of  a  captain 
being  the  instructor)  by  the  lieutenant  colonel 
or  major. 

48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of 
the  instruction  of  companies,  on  which  that  of 
the  regiment  depends,  and  the  first  principles 
haying  the  greatest  influence  upon  this  individual 
instruction,  classes  of  recruits  should  be  hatched 
with  .the  greatest  care. 

H».  I  QSi  motors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and 
precise  words,  the  movement  to  be  executed;  and 
not  to  overburden  the  memory  of  the  men,  they 
will  always  age  the  same  terms  to  explain  the 
same  principles. 

50.  They  should  often  join  example  to  precept, 
should  keep  up  the  attention  of  the  men  by  an 


INSTRUCTION    OF   THE    BATTALION.  13 

animated  tone,  and  pass  rapidly  from  one  move- 
ment to  another,  as  soon  as  that  which  they  com- 
mand has  been  executed  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 

51.  The  sabre  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed 
when  required  to  be  used,  either  for  attack  or 
defence;  the  exercises  and  manoeuvres  will  be 
executed  without  the  bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet 
to  be  fixed,  the  chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause 
the  signal  to  fix  bayonet,  to  be  sounded ;  at  this 
signal  the  men  will  fix  bayonets  without  command, 
and  immediately  replace  their  pieces  in  the  posi- 
tion they  were  before  the  signal. 

Instruction  of  Officers. 

53.  The  instruction  of  officers  can  be  perfected 
only  by  joining  theory  to  practice.  The  colonel 
will  often  practice  them  in  marching  and  in  esti- 
mating distances,  and  he  will  carefully  endeavor 
to  cause  them  to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and 
swiftness.  They  will  also  be  exercised  in  the 
double  quick  step. 

f  •  54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all 
the  Titles  in  this  system  of  drill,  and  such  regula- 
tions as  prescribe  their  duties  in  peace  and  war. 
V  55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly 
acquainted  with  the  bugle  signals ;  and  should, 
by  practice,  be  enabled,  if  n  ecessary ,  to  sound  them . 
This  knowledge,  so  necessary  in  general  instruc- 
tion, becomes  of  vital  importance  on  actual  service 
in  the  field. 


14  INSTRUCTION    OF    THE    BATTALION. 


Instruction  of  Soy  ants. 

56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  a  com- 
pany materially  depend  on  the  conduct  and  char- 
acter of  its  sergeants,  they  should  be  selected  with 
care,  and  properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties 
appertaining  to  their  rank. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include 
the  School  of  the  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Com- 
pany, and  the  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  should 
likewise  know  all  the  details  of  service,  and  the 
regulations  prescribing  their  duties  in  garrison 
and  in  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  (hi- corporals  in  his 
company  those  whom  he  judges  fit  to  be  admitted 
to  the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  sergeants. 

Instruction  of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include 
the  School  of  the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as 
prescribe  their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  cam- 
paign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few 
privates,  who  may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical 
instruction  of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corpo- 
rals is  intended  principally  to  qualify  them  for  the 
instruction  of  the  privates,  they  should  be  taught 
not  only  to  execute,  but  to  explain  intelligibly 
every  thing  they  may  be  required  to  teach. 


INSTRUCTION    OF    THE   BATTALION.  15 


Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

02.  The  command  of  cation.,  which  is  attention. 

63.  The  prejntr a  tori/  command,  which  indicates 
the  movement  which  is  to  be  executed. 

64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march 
or  halt,  or,  in  the  manual  of  arms,  the  part  of 
command  which  causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated, 
distinct,  and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the 
number  of  men  under  instruction. 

66.  The  command  attention  is  pronounced  at 
the  top  of  the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pro- 
nounced in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  prepara- 
tory commands  are  herein  distinguished  by  italics, 
those  of  execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from 
their  length,  are  difficult  to  be  pronounced  at 
once,  must  be  divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  with 
an  ascending  progression  in  the  tone  of  command, 
but  always  in  such  a  manner  that  the  tone  of 
execution  may  be  more  energetic  and  elevated ; 
the'  divisions  are  indicated  by  a  hyphen.  The 
parts  of  commands  which  are  placed  in  a  paren- 
thesis are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE  SECOND. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the 
Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  indi- 
vidual and  progressive  instruction  of  the  recruits, 
the  instructor  never  requires  a  movement  to  be 
executed  until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation 
of  it ;  and  he  executes,  himself,  the  movement 
which  he  commands,  so  as  to  join  example  to  pre- 
cept, lie  accustoms  the  recruit  to  take,  by  him- 
self, the  position  which  is  explained — teaches  him 
to  rectify  it  only  when  required  by  his  want  of 
intelligence — and  sees  that  all  the  movements  are 
performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  be- 
fore passing  to  another.  After  they  have  been 
properly  executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  each 
lesson,  the  instructor  no  longer  confines  himself  to 
that  order;  on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it, 
that  he  may  judge  of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 
I  1%1.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at 
the  end  of  each  part  of  the  lessons,  and  oftener,  if 
he  thinks  proper,  especially  at  the  commencement; 
for  this  purpose  he  commands  Kest. 

73.   At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no 
longer  required  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  re- 
main in  his  place.     If  the  instructor  wishes  merely 
(16) 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — PART    I.         17 

to  relieve  the  attention  of  the  recruit,  he  com- 
mands, in  place — Rest  ;  the  soldier  is  then  not 
required  to  preserve  his  immobility,  but  he  al- 
ways keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its  place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence 
the  instruction,  he  commands — Attention;  at 
this  commaud,  the  soldier  takes  his  position,  re- 
mains motionless,  and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  will  be  divided 
into  three  parts :  the  first,  comprehending  what 
ought  to  be  taught  to  recruits  without  arms;  the 
second,  the  manual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and 
firings;  the  third,  the  principles  of  alignment, 
the  march  by  the  front,  the  different  steps,  the 
march  by  the  flank,  the  principles  of  wheeling, 
and  those  of  change  of  direction;  also,  long 
marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

76.  Each  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as 
follows  : 

PART    FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms : 
Eyes  right,  left,  and  front. 

Lesson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  com- 
mon and  quick  time. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in 
double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

PART    SECOND. 

Ijesson  1.   Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  2.   Manual  of  arms. 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 


18         K'HOOL   OF   TIIE    SOLDIER — rART    I. 

/.  jaon  -t.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  and 
by  rank. 

/,'  sson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  G.  liayonct  exercise. 

PART   THIRD. 

Less&fi  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for 
instruction  in  the  principles  of  alignment. 

1j,  88on  "_'.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march, 
and  the  different  steps. 

Lesson  3.   The  march  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  change 
of  direction. 

/.■  sson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 

PART  FIRST. 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one 
recruit  at  a  time ;  but  three  or  four  may  be 
united,  when  the  number  be  great,  compared  with 
that  of  the  instructors.  In  this  case,  the  re- 
cruits will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  at  one  pace 
from  each  other.  In  tkis  part,  the  recruits  will 
be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 

Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other 
as  the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 

The  feet  turned  nut  equally,  and  forming  with 
each  otlor  something  less  than  a  right  angle; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.    19 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little 
forward  ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally; 

The  elbows  near  the  body ; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the 
front,  the  little  finger  behind  the  seam  of  the 
pantaloons; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  with- 
out constraint; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it ; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  strik- 
ing the  ground  about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 

Remarks  on  the  position  of  the  Soldier. 

Heels  on  the  same  line  ; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  the  other, 
the  shoulder  on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back, 
or  the  position  of  the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed ; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who 
have  legs  with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  con- 
straint, make  their  heels  touch  while  standing. 

The  feet  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large  an 

angle. 

v     Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than 
the  other,  a  shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if 


20    SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 

both  foot  be  ton  much  turned  out,  it  would  not 
be  practicable  to  incline  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  forward  without  rendering  the  whole  posi- 
tion unsteady. 

Knees  extended  without  stiffness  ; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue 
would  be  unavoidable. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips ; 

Because  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position. 
The  instructor  will  observe  that  many  recruits 
hare  the  bad  habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of 
drawing  in  a  side,  or  of  advancing  a  hip,  particu- 
larly the  right,  when  under  arms.  These  are  de- 
fects he  will  labor  to  correct. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  inclining  forward ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  arc  disposed  to  do 
the  reverse,  to  project  the  belly,  and  to  throw  back 
the  shoulders,  when  they  wish  to  hold  themselves 
erect,  from  which  result  great  inconveniences  in 
marching.  The  habit  of  inclining  forward  the 
upper  part  of  the  body  is  so  important  to  con- 
tract, that  the  instructor  must  enforce  it  at  the 
beginning,  particularly  with  recruits  who  have 
naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulders  square ; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond 
the  line  of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched,  (the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.    21 

defect  called  round-shouldered,  not  uncommon 
among  recruits,)  the  man  cannot  align  himself, 
nor  use  his  piece  with  address.  It  is  important, 
then,  to  correct  this  defect,  and  necessary  to  that 
end  that  the  coat  should  set  easy  about  the  shoul- 
ders and  arm-pits  ;  but  in  correcting  this  defect, 
the  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  shoulders 
be  not  thrown  too  much  to  the  rear,  which  would 
cause  the  belly  to  project,  and  the  small  of  the 
back  to  be  curved. 


The  arms  hanging  naturally,  elbows  near  the  body,  the 
palm  of  the  hand  a  little  turned  to  the  front,  the  little 
finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  ; 

Because  these  positions  are  equally  important 
to  the  shoulder-arms,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from 
Occupying  more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  necessary 
to  a  free  use  of  the  piece ;  they  have,  moreover, 
the  advantage  of  keeping  in  the  shoulders. 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  without  constraint; 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  posi- 
tion, it  would  communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of 
the  upper  part  of  the  body,  embarrass  its  move- 
ments, and  give  pain  and  fatigue. 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintain- 
ing the  shoulders  in  line — an  essential  object,  to 
be  insisted  on  and  attained. 


'     22         SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART   I. 

80.  The  instructor  haying  given  the  recruit 
the  position  of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now 
beacD  him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes. 
He  will  command  : 

1.  Eyes — Right.     2.  Front. 

81.  At  the  word  rigid,  the  recruit  will  turn  the 
head  gently,  so  as  to  bring-  the  inner  corner  of  the 
left  eye  in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat, 
the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men 
in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  re- 
sume the  direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  be  ex- 
ecuted by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that 
the  movement  of  the  head  docs  not  derange  the 
squareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  will  happen 
if  the  movement  of  the  former  be  too  sudden. 

85.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  recruit 
to  pass  from  the  state  of  attention  to  that  of 
case,  he  will  command: 

4  Rest. 

80.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual 
position,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his 
attention ;  at  the  second,  he  will  resume  the  pre- 
scribed position  and  steadiness. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.    23 


Lesson  II. 


Facings. 

88.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  one  time,  or  pause.  The  instructor  will 
command  : 

>      1.  Squad.     2.  Eight  (or  left') — Face. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right 
foot  slightly,  turn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes 
a  little,  and  then  replace  the  right  heel  by  the 
side  of  the  left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to*Wie  rear  (or  front)  will  be 
executed  in  two  times,  or  pauses.  The  instructor 
will  command  : 


1.  Squad.    2.  About — Face. 

91.  (First  time.')  At  the  word  about,  the.  re- 
cruit will  turn  on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe 
to  the  front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the 
hollow  opposite  to,  and  full  three  inches  from, 
the  left  heel,  the  feet  square  to  each  other. 

92.  (Second  time.)  At  the  word/ace,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  ex- 
tend the  hams,  face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the 
same  time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

93.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  these 
motions  do  not  derange  the  position  of  the  body. 


24    SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 

Lesson  III. 

Principles  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in 
common  time,  will  be  twenty-eight  inches,  reckon- 
ing from  heel  to  heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the 
rate  of  ninety  in  a  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed 
in  his  position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principle 
and  mechanism  of  this  step — placing  himself  six 
or  seven  paces  from,  and  facing  to,  the  recruit. 
He  will  himself  execute  slowly  the  step  in  the 
way  of  illustration,  and  then  command  : 

1.   Squad,  forward.*  2.    Common  time. 
3.  March. 

96.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will 
throw  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg, 
without  bending  the  left  knee. 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but 
without  a  jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near 
the  ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little  de- 
pressed, and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned  out; 
he  will,  at  the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the 
body  forward,  and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without 
shock,  precisely  at  the  distance  where  it  finds  it- 
self from  the  right  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is 
brought  forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest 
on  the  advanced  foot.  The  recruit  will  next,  in 
like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — rART  I.    25 

above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel 
of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march  with- 
out crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  the  one  against 
the  other,  without  turning  the  shoulders,  and 
preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

98.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest 
the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  when  either  foot  is  coming 
to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  the  rear  will  be  brought 
up,  and  planted  by  the  side  of  the  other,  without 
shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate  from  time  to 
time,  to  the  recruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by 
giving  the  command  one  at  the  instant  of  raising 
a  foot,  and  two  at  the  instant  it  ought  to  be 
planted,  observing  the  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in 
a  minute.  This  method  will  contribute  greatly 
to  impress  upon  the  mind  the  two  motions  into 
which  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in 
the  first  and  second  parts  of  the  School  of  the 
Soldier.  As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  acquired 
steadiness,  has  become  established  in  the  princi- 
ples of  shouldered  arms,  and  in  the  mechanism, 
length  and  swiftness  of  the  step  in  common  time, 
he  will  be  practiced  only  in  quick  time,  the  dou- 
ble quick  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time 
arc  the  same  as  for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness 


26    SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 

is  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per 
minute. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march 
in  quick  time,  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 


Lesson  IV. 

Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is 
thirty-three  inches,  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate 
of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 
*  105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  re- 
cruits the  principles  and  mechanism  of  the  double 
quick  step,  will  command  : 


1.  Double  quick  step.     2.  March. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the   recruit  wil 
raise  his  hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands 
closed,  the  nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to 
the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to 
the  front  his  left  leg  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the 
knee  the  greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg 
between  the  knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe 
depressed;  he  will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its 
former  position ;  with  the  right  leg  he  will  exe- 
cute what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left, 
and  the  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  be 
continued  until  the  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.    27 


1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will 
bring  the  foot  which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the 
other,  and  dropping  at  the  same  time  his  hands 
by  his  side,  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms. 

109.  The  instructor,  placing  himself  seven  or 
eight  paces  from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  in- 
dicate the  cadence  by  the  commands,  one  and  tivo, 
given  alternately  at  the  instant  each  foot  should 
be  brought  to  the  ground,  which  at  first  will  be  in 
common  time,  but  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually 
augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established 
in  the  principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  Double  quick. 
3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will 
throw  the  weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his 
arms  as  indicated  No.  106. 

113.  At  the  third  command  he  will  carry  for- 
ward the  left  foot,  the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee 
somewhat  raised — will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe 
first,  thirty-three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with 
the  right  foot  will  then  execute  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  left.  This  alternate  move- 
ment of  the  legs  will  take  place  by  throwing  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted, 


28    SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

and  by  allowing  a  natural,  oscillatory  motion  to 
the  arms. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed 
with  different  decrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent 
circumstances  the  cadence  of  this  step  may  be  in- 
creased to  one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute. 
At  this  rate  a  distance  of  four  thousand  yards 
would  be  passed  over  in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

115.  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  run- 
ning. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the 
double  quick  step,  the  only  difference  consisting 
in  a  greater  degree  of  swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double 
quick  time,  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should 
breathe  as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose, 
keeping  the  mouth  closed.  Experience  has 
proved  that,  by  conforming  to  this  principle,  a 
man  can  pass  over  a  much  longer  distance,  and 
with  less  fatigue. 


PART    SECOND. 

GENERAL   RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to 
this  second  part  until  they  shall  be  well  estab- 
lished in  the  position  of  the  body,  and  in  the 
manner  of  marching  at  the  different  steps. 

119.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he 
will  place  in  the  same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and 
instruct  them  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms, 
as  follows : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.    29 

Lesson  I. 
Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in 
the  first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will 
cause  him  to  bend  the  right  arm  slightly,  and 
place  the  piece  in  it,  in  the  following  manner  : 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand — the  barrel 
nearly  vertical,  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the 
shoulder — the  guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hang- 
ing nearly  at  its  full  length  near  the  body ;  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the 
remaining  fingers  closed  together,  and  grasping 
the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under  the  cock,  which 
rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  llecruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural 
defects  in  the  conformation  of  the  shoulders, 
breast,  and  hips.  These  the  instructor  will  labor 
to  correct  in  the  lessons  without  arms,  and  after- 
wards by  steady  endeavors,  so  that  the  appear- 
ance of  the  pieces,  in  the  same  line,  may  be  uni- 
form, and  this  without  constraint  to  the  men  in 
their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  re- 
mark that  recruits,  on  first  bearing  arms,  arc 
liable  to  derange  their  position  by  lowering  the 
right  shoulder  and  the  right  hand,  or  by  sinking 
the  hip  and  spreading  out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these 
faults  by  continually  rectifying  the  position ;  he 
will  sometimes  take  away  the  piece  to  replace  it 
the  better ;  he  will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too 


30    SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

much  in  the  beginning,  but  labor  by  degrees  to 
render  this  position  so  natural  and  easy  that  they 
may  remain  in  it  a  long  time  without  fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care 
that  the  piece,  at  a  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too 
high  nor  too  low  :  if  too  high,  the  right  elbow 
would  spread  out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too 
much  space  in  his  rank,  and  the  piece  be  made  to 
waver  -,  if  too  low,  the  files  would  be  too  much 
closed,  the  soldier  would  not  have  the  necessary 
space  to  handle  his  piece  with  facility,  the  right 
arm  would  become  too  much  fatigued,  and  would 
draw  down  the  shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  to  be  repeated  the  movements 
of  eyes  right,  left,  and  front,  and  the  facings. 


Lesson  II. 
Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to 
four  men,  placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  afterwards  in  two  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one 
time,  (or  pause,)  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into 
motions,  the  better  to  make  known  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in 
the  manual  of  arms,  with  the  exceptions  herein 
indicated,  is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  min- 
ute ;  but,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention, 
the  instructor  will,  at  first,  look  more  particularly 
to  the  execution  of  the  motions,  without  requiring 


SCHOOL   OF   TIIE    SOLDIER — PART    II.        31 

a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he  will 
bring  the  recruits  progressively,  and  after  they 
shall  have  become  a  little  familiarized  with  the 
handling  of  the  piece. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge, 
to  the  rammer,  and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of 
the  bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  pre- 
scribed, nor  even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they 
will  not  be  subjected  to  that  cadence.  The  in- 
structor will,  however,  labor  to  cause  these  mo- 
tions to  be  executed  with  promptness,  and,  above 
all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  de- 
cide the  brisk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each 
time,  (or  pause.)  The  commands  two,  three,  and 
four,  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the  other 
motions.  As  soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  com- 
prehend the  positions  of  the  several  motions  of 
a  time,  they  will  be  taught  to  execute  the  time 
without  resting  on  its  diiferent  motions ;  the  me- 
chanism of  the  time  will  nevertheless  be  observed, 
as  well  to  give  a  perfect  use  of  the  piece,  as  to 
avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slurring  over,  either  of 
the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the 
following  progression :  The  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

Sujtport — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

133.  {First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the 
right  hand,  perpendicularly  to  the  front  and  be- 
tween the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear ;  seize  the 


• 


:)2      school  op  the  soldier — part  ii. 

pieco  with  the  loft  hand  at  the  lower  band,  raise 
this  hand  as  high  as  the  chin,  and  seize  the  piece 
at  tlic  same  time  with  the  right  hand  four  inches 
below  the  cock. 

1  .'>  4.  (  Seco?id  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front;  carry  the  piece 
to  the  left  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm  extended 
on  the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the 
cock  ;  support  the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm, 
the  left  hand  resting  on  the  ris:ht  breast. 

135.  {Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  by 
the  side. 

1 86.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  re- 
pose in  this  position,  he  will  command  : 

Hest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring 
up  smartly  the  right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the 
piece,  (small  of  the  stock,)  when  they  will   not 
be  required  to  preserve  silence,  or  steadiness  of. 
position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  re- 
cruits to  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence 
and  steadiness,  he  will  command: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

139.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  re- 
sume the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  support 

(inns. 


33 


23 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.    33 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

140.  {First  motion.')  Grasp  the  piece  with  the 
ric;ht  hand  under  and  against  the  left  fore-arm  ; 
seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the 
thumb  extended ;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from 
the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

141.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  verti- 
cally to  the  right  shoulder  with  both  hands,  the 
rammer  to  the  front,  change  the  position  of  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

142.  (Third  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand 
quickly  by  the  side. 

Present — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

143.  (First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand 
bring  the  piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the 
body,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  at  the  same  time 
seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  half-way  between 
the  guide  sight  and  lower  band,  the  thumb 
extended  along  the  barrel  and  against  the  stock, 
the  fore-arm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

144.  (Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the 
guard. 

VOL  I. — 2 


34        SCHOOL  OF  THE  soldier — FART  ii. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the 
right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  change  the  posi- 
tion of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the 
guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  slip  up 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the 
lingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  near- 
ly straight. 

146.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand 
quickly  by  the  side. 

Order — ARMS.    ' 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

147.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly 
with  the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  de- 
tach it  slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right 
hand  ;  loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower 
the  piece  with  the  left,  reseize  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand  above  the  lower  band,  the  little  finger 
in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches 
from  the  ground,  the  right  hand  supported 
against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

148.  (Second,  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip 
through  the  right  hand  to  the  ground  by  open- 
ing slightly  the  fingers,  and  take  the  position 
about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  order  arms. 

149.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger,  extended  along  the  stock ; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.    35 

the  other  fingers  extended  and  joined;  the  muzzle 
about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder ;  the 
rammer  in  front ;  the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt 
against,  and  in  a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right 
foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

150.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give 
repose  in  this  position,  he  will  command : 

Rest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not 
be  required  to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  re- 
cruits to  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence 
and  steadiness,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  re- 
sume the  position  of  order  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

154.  {First  motion.*)  Raise  the  piece  vertically 
with  the  right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right 
breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow 
close  to  the  body ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  below  the  right,  and  drop  quickly  the  right 
hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock, 
the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard ; 
press  the  piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left 
hand,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 


SOHOOL   Of   THE    SOLDiSB — PART   II. 

L55.  8  nd  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand 
quickly  by  the  Bide. 

Load  in  nine  times. 

1.  Load.* 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

156.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  m 
high  as  the  right  elbow,  and  bring  it  vertically 
opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  shift  the  right 
•hand  to  the  upper  hand,  place  the  butt  between 
tin-  feet,  the  barrel  to  the  front  ;  Beize  it  with  the 
left  hand  near  the  muzzle,  which  should  be  three 
inches  from  the  body;  carry  the  right  hand  to 
the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handk — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and 
next  two  fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the 
cartridge  upright  between  the  thumb  and  first 
two  fingers,  near  the  top;  in  this  position  place 
it  in  front  of  and  near  the  muzzle — the  back  of 
the  hand  to  the  front. 

*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  exe- 
cuted, the  instructor  will  cause  tho  cartridge  boxes  to 
be  brought  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.   37 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel ;  disen- 
gage the  ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  hand 
and  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left ; 
insert  it  into  the  bore,  the  pointed  end  upper- 
most, and  press  it  down  with  the  right  thumb ; 
seize  the  head  of  the  rammer  with  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  fin- 
gers closed,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Draw — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

160.  {First  motion.')  Half  draw  the  rammer 
by  extending  the  right  arm  j  steady  it  in  this 
position  with  the  left  thumb ;  grasp  the  rammer 
near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  the  little 
finger  uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  rammer. 

161.  {Second  motion.')  Clear  the  rammer  from 
the  pipes  by  again  extending  the  arm ;  the  ram- 
mer in  the  prolongation  of  the  pipes. 

162.  {Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the 
little  end  of  the  rammer  passing  near  the  left 
shoulder ;  place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the 
ball,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge.    * 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and 


38   SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the 
left  hand ;  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small  end 
with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand, 
the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front ;  press  the  ball 
home,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

7.  Return — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

164.  {First  motion.')  Draw  the  rammer  half- 
way out,  and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the 
left  thumb ;  grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with  the 
right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the  nails 
to  the  front,  the  thumb  along  the  rammer ;  clear 
the  rammer  from  the  bore  by  extending  the  arm, 
the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer  in  the  pro- 
longation of  the  bore. 

165.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the 
head  of  the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  should- 
er, and  insert  it  in  the  pipes  until  the  right  hand 
reaches  the  muzzle,  the  nails  to  the  front. 

166.  (Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home 
by  placing  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on 
the  head  of  the  rammer ;  pass  the  left  hand 
down  the  barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  with- 
out depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Prime.* 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

167.  (First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise 
the  piece  till  the  hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp 


**  If  Maynard's  primer  be  used,  the  command  will  be 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.   39 

the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand ;  half 
face  to  the  right;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the 
right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles  with  the 
left ;  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against  the  left 
heel.  Slip  the  left  hand  down  to  the  lower  band, 
the  thumb  along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against 
the  body ;  bring  the  piece  to  the  right  side,  the 
butt  below  the  right  fore-arm — the  small  of  the 
stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches  below  the 
right  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  muzzle  on 
a  level  with  the  eye. 

168.  (Second  motion.}  Half  cock  with  the 
thumb  of  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  supported 
against  the  guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock ; 
remove  the  old  cap  with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the 
right  hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch, 
place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down  with  the 
thumb ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand. 

9.  Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

169.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  and  support  it  there  with  the  left  hand, 

load  in  eight  times,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be, 
shoulder  arms,  and  executed  from  return  rammer,  in  one 
time  and  two  motions,  as  follows: 

(First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and 
take  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

(Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the 
side. 


40        m  E&CSL    01    T11K    SOLDIER — rART   II. 

face  to  the  front;  bring  the  right  heel  to  the 
side  of  and   on  :t  line  with  the  I  the 

piece  with  the  right  hand  as  indicate  !  in  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms. 

17".  {Second  motion.')  Drop  the  left  hand 
quickly  by  the  side. 

Heady. 

One  timr  and  three  motions. 

171.  (First  motion.')  Raise  the  piece  Blightly 
with  the  right  band,  making  a  half  face  to  the 

right  on  the  left  hocl  ;  carry  the  right  foot  to 
the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right  angles  to  the  left, 

the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to  and  against  the  left 

heel;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the 
shoulder. 

172._  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece 
with  both  hands,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  left 
thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  butt  below 
the  right  fore-arm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against 
the  body  and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast, 
the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  side;  place  at  the  same  time  the  right 
thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock,  the  other  fingers 
under  and  against  the  guard. 

173.  (Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the 
piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock  without  deranging 
the  position  of  the  butt. 


school  of  the  soldier — rart  ii.      41 

Aim. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  sup- 
port the  butt  against  the  right  shoulder ;  the  left 
elbow  down,  the  right  as  high  as  the  shoulder;  in- 
cline the  head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye 
may  perceive  quickly  the  notch  of  the  hausse,  the 
front  sight,  and  the  object  aimed  at;  the  left  eye 
closed,  the  right  thumb  extended  along  the  stock, 
the  fore-finder  on  the  trigger. 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks 
to  execute  the  firings,  the  front  rank  men  will 
raise  a  little  less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to  facili- 
tate the  aim  of  the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each 
carry  the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right, 
and  towards  the  left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the 
right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  for- 
ward. 

Fire.    . 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  fore-finder  against  the  tri^cr, 

C  ~  CO  / 

fire,  without  loading  or  turning  the  head,  and 
remain  in  this  position. 

178.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe  when 
the  men  fire,  that  they  aim  at  some  distinct  object, 
and  that  the  barrel  be  so  directed  that  the  line  of 
fire  and  the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same  vertical 
plane.     They  will  often  cause  the  firing  to  be  cxe- 


IS        BOHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    II. 

cutcd  on  ground  of  different  inclinations,  in  order 
t<»  accustom  tlie  men  to  fire  at  objects  either  above 
or  below  them. 

Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at 
the  same  time  face  to  the  front  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  load  as  indicated  No.  156.  Each  rear 
rank  man  will  bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  the  loading  to  be  continued  by 
the  commands  and  means  prescribed  No.  156  and 
following. 

181.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not 
wish  the  recruits  to  reload,  he  will  command : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left 
hand  and  resume  the  position  of  shoulder  arms, 
at  the  same  time  face  to  the  front,  turning  on  the 
left  heel,  and  bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with 
the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the 
command  fire,  the  instructor,  when  they  are  in 
the  position  of  aim,  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.    43 

Recover — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw 
the  finger  from  the  trigger;  at  the  command  arms, 
retake  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the 
third  motion  of  ready,  if  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb 
upon  the  cock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  half- 
cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the 
piece  briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will 
command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

188.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  and  detach 
it  slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand. 

189.  {Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  lower  it  with  the  left  hand,  opposite 


41    SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

the  middle  of  the  body,  and  place  the  butt  between 
the  feel  without  shock;  the  rammer  to  the  rear, 
the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  three  inches  from 
the  body  ;  Beize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  upper 

band,  nnd  carry  the  left  baud  reversed  to  the 
handle  of  the  sabre-bayonet. 

190.  (Third  motion.)  Draw  the  sabre-bayonet 
from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of 
the  barrel ;  Bciae  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the 
arm  extended,  the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  a  n  < d  two  motions, 

191.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder, 
the  rammer  to  the  front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the 
same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the 
stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the 
guard,  the  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

192.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  the  left 
hand  by  the  Bide. 

Ch a  rye — B  A  YO N  ET . 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

193.  (First  motion.}  Raise  the  piece  slightly 
with  the  right  hand  and  make  a  half  face  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow  of  the 
right  foot  opposite  to,  and  three  inches  from  the 
left  heel,  the  feet  square  \  seize  the  piece  at  the 


2i.9. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.   45 

same  time  with  the  left  hand  a  little  above  the 
lower  band. 

194.  {Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece 
with  both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left 
elbow  against  the  body ;  seize  the  small  of  the 
stock,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which 
will  be  supported  against  the  hip  ;  the  point  of  the 
sabre-bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  (First  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly 
with  the  left  hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it 
against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the 
front;  turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the 
guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  right  hand  nearly  extended. 

196.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand 
smartly  by  the  side. 

Trail — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

197.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  mo- 
tion of  order  arms. 

198.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle 
slightly  to  the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about 
four  inches  from  the  ground.  The  right  hand 
supported  at  the  hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the 
rear  rank  men  may  not  touch  with  their  bayonets 
the  men  in  the  front  rank. 


46      school  or  the  soldier — rART  n. 


Shoulder — Arms. 

100.  At  the  command  should*  r,  raise  the  piece 
perpendicularly  in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger 
in  rear  of  the  barrel ;  at  the  command  arms,  exe- 
cute what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder 
from  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Unfix — Bayonet, 

On<  itiw  and  three  motions. 

200.  (  First  and  second  motions.')  The  Bame  as 
the  ftrei  and  Becond  motions  of  fix  hayonett  except 

that,  at  the  end  of  the  second  command,  the  thumb 

of  the  right  hand  will  be  placcjl  on  the  spring  of 
the  sabre-bayonet,  and  the  left  hand  will  embrace 
tlic  handle  of  the  sabre-bayonet  and  the  barrel, 
the  thumb  extended  along  the  blade. 

201.  (  Third  'motion.)  Press  the  thumb  of  the 
right  hand  on  the  spring.  wrest  oil'  the  sabre- 
bayonet,  turn  it  (<>  the  right,  the  edge  to  the 
front,  lower  the  guard  until  it  touches  the  right 
hand,  which  will  seize  the  hack  and  the  edge  of 
the  blade  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  lingers, 
the  other  fingers  holding  the  piece;  change  the 
position  of*  the  hand  without  quitting  the  handle, 
rei  urn  the  sabre-bayonet  to  the  scabbard,  and  seize 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm  extended. 


F.ii 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.    47 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  tioo  motions. 

202.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  mo- 
tion from  fix  bayonet,  No.  191. 

203.  (Second,  motion.')  The  same  as  the  second 
motion  from  fix  bayonet,  No.  192. 

Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  mo- 
tion of  support  arms, No.  133,  except  with  the  right 
hand  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front;  bring  it  opposite 
the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left 
hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the 
chin  and  extended  on  the  rammer ;  the  piece  erect 
and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm 
against  the  piece. 

206.  (Third  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass 
it  under  the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at 
the  lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  pre- 
vent it  from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting 
against  the  hip,  the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same 
time  by  the  side. 


4S        SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — PART   II. 

Shoulder — A  rms. 
One  time  and  three  motion*. 

207.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the 
hit  hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
small  of  the  stock.  The  piece  erect  ami  detached 
from  the  Bhoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left 
fore-arm  along  the  piece. 

208.  (Second  motion.)  Jhe  same  as  the  second 
motion  of  shoulder  arm*  from  <i  support. 

209.  (  Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third 
motion  of  shoulder  arms  from  a  support 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

210.  (First  motion.)  Detach  the  piece  perpen- 
dicularly from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand, 
and  seize  it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band 
and  guide-sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at 
the  height  of  the  shoulder  and  four  inches  from 
it ;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the 
butt,  the  beak  between  the  first  two  fingers,  the 
other  two  fingers  under  the  butt  plate. 

211.  (Seeond  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  raise  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right 
shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  the  lock  plate  up- 
wards ;  let  fall,  at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand 
by  the  Bide. 


SCHOOL   OP   THE    SOLDIER — PART   II.         ±9 

Sho  ulder — A  RMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

212.  {First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpen- 
dicularly by  extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full 
length,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time 
seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  between  the 
lower  band  and  c;uide  sight. 

213.  {Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the 
•right  hand,  which  will  immediately  embrace  the 
guard,  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms,  slide  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  closed.  Drop 
the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  in- 
structor will  sometimes  cause  pieces  to  be  brought 
to  the  right  shoulder.  To  this  effect,  he  will 
command : 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  below  and  near  the  left  fore-arm, 
place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of 
the  butt  between  the  first  two  fingers. 

216.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards,  carry  it  to  the 
right  shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  butt, 
the  muzzle  elevated ;  hold  the  piece  in  this  posi- 
tion and  place  the  right  hand  upon  the  butt,  as  is 


50       BOBOOI   Of  Tin:   BOLDItt — PART  IT. 

Bribed  No.  210,  and  let  full  the  left  hand  by 

the  ude. 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  tiro  WiOtiont. 

217.  (  First  motion.')  The  same  as  the  first  mo- 
tion of  shoulder  arms]  No.  212. 

2  lv  S  nd  motion.)  Turn  the  pieee  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  oppo- 
site the  hit  Bhonlder,  Blip  the  right  hand  to  the 
small  of  the  stuck,  place  the  left  fore-arm  ex- 
tended on  the  breasl  as  is  prescribed  No.  184,  and 
let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Arms — At  will. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  plea- 
sure on  either  Bhonlder,  with  one  or  both  hands, 

the  muzzle  chvan d. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  (juickly  the  posi- 
tion of  shoulder  amis. 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be 
placed  on  the  ground,  Ik;  will  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    SOLDIER — FART   II.        51 

Ground — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

222.  {First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time 
seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend 
the  body,  advance  the  left  foot,  the  heel  opposite 
the  lower  band )  lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with 
the  right  hand,  the  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with 
the  right  toe,  the  knees  slightly  bent,  the  right 
heel  raised. 

223.  (Second  motion.')  Rise  up,  bring  the  left 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  right,  quit  the  cartridge  box 
with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  the  hands  by  the 
side. 

Raise — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

224.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box 
with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the 
left  foot  opposite  the  lower  band,  and  seize  the 
piece  with  the  right  hand. 

225.  (Second  motion.)  liaise  the  piece,  bringing 
the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right ;  turn  the 
piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  rammer  to  the 
front;  at  the  same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box 
with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  this  hand  by  the  side. 

Inspection  of  Arms. 
22G.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  and 


5ti        BOftOOL    OF    THE   SOLDIER — PART    II. 

having  the  sabre-bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the 
instructor  wishes  to  cause  an  inspection  of  arms, 
he  will  command  : 

In  tpeci  ion — Ar  BIS. 

One  time  and  tiro  mot  inns. 

227.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  below  and  near  the  upper  band,  carry  it 
with  h<ith  hands  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body, 
the  butt  between  the  feet,  the  rammer  to  the  rear, 
the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  about  three  inches 
from  the  body;  carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to 
the  sabre-bayonet,  draw  it  from  the  scabbard  and 
fix  it  on  the  barrel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  below  and  near  the  upper  band,  seize  the 
rammer  with  the  thumb  and  fore-iinger  of  the 
right  hand  bent,  the  other  fingers  closed. 

228.  {Second  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  as  has 
been  explained  in  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the 
bottom  of  the  bore,  replace  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  opposite  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the 
position  of  ora\  r<  d  etrfeis. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succes- 
sion the  piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the 
front  of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches 
him,  will  raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right 
hand, seize  it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band 
and  guide  Bight,  the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite 
to  the  left  eye  ;  the  instructor  will  take  it  with  the 
right  hand  at  the  handle,  and,  after  inspecting  it, 
will  return  it  to  the  recruit,  who  will  receive  it 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.    53 

back  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace  it  in  the 
position  of  ordered  arms. 

230.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him, 
each  recruit  will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at 
the  command  inspection  arms,  return  the  rammer, 
and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  in- 
structor should  merely  wish  to  cause  bayonets  to 
be  fixed,  he  will  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

232.  Take  the  position  indicated  No.  227,  fix 
bayonets  as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately 
resume  the  position  of  ordered,  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after 
firing,  to  ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been 
discharged,  he  will  command  : 

Spring — Rammers. 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been 
explained  above,  and  immediately  retake  the  posi- 
tion of  ordered  arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can 
take  the  rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it 
in  the  barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to  make  it 
ring  in  the  barrel. 

236.  Kach  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes 
him,  will  return  rammer,  and  resume  the  position 
of  ordered  arms. 


54        SCHOOL   OF    THE   SOLDIER — rART   II. 


Remarks  on  the  Manual  of  Artht. 

237.  The  manual  of  arms  frequently  distorts  the 

persons  of  recruit.-  before  they  acquire  ease  and 
confidence  in  the  several  positions.  The  instruc- 
tor will  therefore  frequently  recur  to  elementary 
principles  in  the  course  of  the  lessons. 

238.  Recruits  arc  also  extremely  liable  to  curve 
the  sides  and  back,  and  to  derange  the  Bhonlderl, 
especially  in  loading.  Consequently,  the  instruc- 
tor will  not  cause  them  to  dwell  too  long  at  a 
time  in  one  position. 

239.  Whenj  after  some  days  of  exercise  in  the 
manual  of  arms,  the  four  men  shall  be  well  estab- 
lished in  their  use,  the  instructor  will  always  ter- 
minate the  lesson  by  marching  the  men  for  some 
time  in  one  rank,  and  at  4*ie  pace  apart,  in  com- 
mon and  quick  time,  in  order  to  confirm  them 
more  and  more  in  the  mechanism  of  the  step  ;  he 
will  also  teach  them  to  mark  time  and  to  change 
step,  which  will  be  executed  in  the  following 
manner : 

To  mar/:  time. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct 
step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  a  loot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  recruits  will  make  a  semblance  of  marching, 
by  bringing  the  heels  by  the  side  of  each  other, 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER PART   II.   *     55 

and  observing  the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  raising 
each  foot  alternately  without  advancing. 

242.  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  to 
be  resumed,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  as  prescribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Change  step.    2.  March. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the 
ground,  bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by  the  side 
of  that  which  is  in  front,  and  step  off  again  with 
the  foot  which  was  in  front. 

To  march  backwards. 

246.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march 
backwards,  will  command : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  March. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will 
step  off  smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches 
to  the  rear,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on 


[){j        SCHOOL    01    THE    SOLDIER PART    II. 

with  tin1  feet  in  succession  till  tin*  command  Jialfj 

which  will  alwajB  be  preceded  by  the  caution 
squad.  The  men  will  halt  at  this  command,  and 
bring  back  the  foot  in  front  by  the  side  of  the 
other. 

2 18.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

-\\).  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the 
reoruite  march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  Die 
met  position  <jf  the  bodj  and  the  piece  be  not 
deranged. 

Lesson  III. 

x  To  h ia 1 1  in  four  tones. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the 
recruits  to  load  at  will,  and  to  cause  them  to  dis- 
tinguish the  times  which  require  the  greatest  regu- 
larity and  attention,  such  as  charge  cartridge, 
ram  cartridge)  and  prime.  It  will  be  divided 
ai  follow.-  : 

251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end 
of  the  command  ;  the  three  others  at  the  com- 
mands, tWO,  (/tn<}  and  four, 

Tl  e  instructor  will  command: 


1.  Load  in  four  times.     2.  Load 
tridge. 


252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  car- 


Two. 

253.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  car- 
tridge. 


school  of  the  soldier — part  ii.     57 

Three. 

254.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  time  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at 
will,  which  will  be  executed  as  loading  in  four 
times,  but  continued,  and  without  resting  on 
either  of  the  times.     He  will  command  : 

1.  Load  at  will*     2.  Load. 

257.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits, 
by  degrees,  to  load  with  the  greatest  possible 
promptitude,  each  without  regulating  himself  by 
his  neighbor,  and  above  all  without  waiting  for 
him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129  is  not 
applicable  to  loading  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 

Lesson  IV. 
Firings. 

250.  The  firings  arc  direct  or  oblique,  and  will 
be  executed  as  follows  : 


58        SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER — rART   II. 


Thr  direct  fire. 

LMK).  The  instructor  will  give  the  following 
commands : 

1.   Fire  by  squads     2.    Squad.     3.  Heady. 
4.  Aim.     5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

2G1.  These  several  commands  will  be  executed 
as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arm*. 
At  the  third  command,  the  men  will  come  to  the 
position  of  n  ady  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the 
fourth  they  will  aim  according  to  the  rank  in 
which  each  may  find  himself  placed,  the  rear  rank 
men  inclining  forward  a  little  the  upper  part  of 
the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may  reach  as 
much  beyond  the  front  rank  as  possible. 

202.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load 
their  pieces  and  return  immediately  to  the  posi- 
tion of  ready. 

263.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing 
by  the  commands : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

204.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to 
cease,  he  will  command  : 

Ceo*  fining. 

205.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease 
firing,  but  will  load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and 
;il'terwards  bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — PART   II.        59 


Oblique  Firings. 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to 
the  right  and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as 
the  direct  fire,  with  this  single  difference — the 
command  aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the 
caution,  right  or  left  oblique. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to 
the  right. 

267.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the 
direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command,  right  oblique, 
the  two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder 
and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  rank 
man  will  aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  the 
feet;  each  rear  rank  man  will  advance  the  left 
foot  about  eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of 
the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his  file  leader  and 
aim  to  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  left  knee. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to 
the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command  left  oblique, 
the  two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  left  shoulder 
and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will 
take  aim  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet ; 


«>!»        SCHOOL   OF   THE   BOLDISB  —  1'ART    11. 

•h  man  in  the  roar  rank  will  advance  the  riLftit 

c 

foot  about  eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of 

the  man  next  OD  the  right  of  his  file  lea<ler,  and 
:tim  to  (he  left,  inclining  (he  Upper  part  of  the 
body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  right  knee. 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  loadj  the 
men  of  each  rank  will  come  ft)  the  position  of 
load  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire;  the  rear 
rank  men  bringing  back  the  foot  which  is  to  the 
right  and  front  by  the  side  of  the  other.  Each 
man  will  continue  to  load  as  if  isolated. 

To  five  by  fit. 

273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  the 
two  ranks,  the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively, 
and  without  regulating  ou  each  other,  except  for 
the  first  fire, 

274.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  byfik.     2.   SqmtL     3.  Heahy.     4. 
Commence  i  iking. 

275.  At   the   third  command,  the  two  ranks 

will  take  the  position  prescribed  in  (he  direct  fire. 
27G.   At  the  fourth  command,  the  file,  on  the 
right  will   aim  and  fire;   the   rear  rank   man  in 
aiming  will  take  the  position  indicated  No.  170. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their 
pieces  briskly  and  fire  a  second  time;  reload  and 
fire  again,  and  so  on  in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim  at  the  instant 
the  first  brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  will 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.   61 

conform  in  all  respects  to  that  which  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear 
rank  men  will  not  be  required  to  fire  at  the  same 
time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to 
the  position  of  ready  and  continue  the  fire. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to 
cease,  he  will  command  : 

Cease — Firing. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease 
firing.  If  they  have  fired,  they  will  load  their 
pieces  and  bring  them  to  a  shoulder;  if  at  the 
position  of  ready,  they  will  half-cock  and  shoulder 
arms.  If  in  the  position  of  aim,  they  will  bring 
down  their  pieces,  half-cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  hy  rmnk. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each 
entire  rank,  alternately. 

284.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   Fire  hy  rank.     2.    Squad.     3.   Ready.     4. 
Rear  ranlc.     5.  Aim.     6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks 
will  take  the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in 
the  direct  fire. 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank 
will  execute  that  which  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  direct  fire,  and  afterwards  take  the  position 
of  ready. 


G2       SCHOOL   Of   Tin:   SOLDIER — PART   II. 

287.  A-  soon  as  the  instructor  vcral 
iniji  of  the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front 
rank  will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for 
tlif  real  rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the 
right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing 
bj  the  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alter- 
nate from  rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the 
firiag  to  cease,  when  he  will  command,  a 
firing,  which  will  be  executed  as  heretofore  pre- 
scribed. 

Lesson  V. 

To  fwc  <md  load  kneeling. 

_".  (i>.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  sup- 
posed  loaded  and  drawn  up  in  one  rank.  The 
instruction  will  be  given  to  each  man  individu- 
ally, without  times  or  motions,  and  in  the  follow- 
ing manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Fire  and  LOAD  knkelinq. 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of 

the  sijuad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt; 
then  earn  the  right  foot  to  the  reat  and  to  the 
righl  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient 
for_  placing  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  in 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART   II.        63 

bending  the  left  leg ;  place  the  right  knee  upon 
the  ground;  lower  the  piece,  the  left  fore-arm 
supported  upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side,  the 
right  hand  on  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt 
resting  on  the  right  thigh,  the  left  hand  support- 
ing the  piece  near  the  lower  band. 

293.  He  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the 
left  around  the  knee  supported  on  the  ground, 
until  this  leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direc- 
tion of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  seat  himself  com- 
fortably on  the  right  heel. 

294.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and 
support  it  with  the  left,  holding  it  near  the  lower 
band,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near 
the  knee;  seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb, 
the  forefinger  under  the  guard,  cock  and  seize  the 
piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock  ;  bring  the  piece 
to  the  shoulder,  aim  and^?*e. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is 
fired,  and  support  it  with  the  left  hand,  the  butt 
resting  against  the  right  thigh  ;  carry  the  piece 
to  the  rear,  rising  on  the  knee,  the  barrel  down- 
wards, the  butt  resting  on  the  ground;  in  this 
position  support  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at 
the  upper  band,  draw  cartridge  with  the  right 
and  load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  neces- 
sary, with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front 
with  the  left  hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper 
band ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock;  turn  the  piece,  the 

.barrel  uppermost  and  nearly  horizontal,  the  left 
elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh ;  half-cock,  remove 
the  old  cap  and  prime,  rise,  and  return  to  the  ranks. 


64        SCHOOL   OF   THE   BOLDISB — rART   IT. 

207.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  bo  on 
through  the  remainder  of  the  squad. 

To  fin-  and  load  lying* 

298.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one 
rank  and  loaded;  the  instruction  will  be  given 
individually  and  without  times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Y\\\Y.    ANI>     LOAD     I.VINC 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right 
of  the  squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and 
halt ;  he  will  then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order, 
drop  on  both  knees,  and  place  himself  en  the 
ground  flat  on  his  belly.  In  this  position  he  will, 
support  the  piece  nearly  horizontal  with  the  left 
hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  butt  end 
of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the 
ground,  the  barrel  uppermost  ;  cook  the  piece 
with  the  light  hand,  and  carry  this  hand  to  the 
Mii.'ill  of  the  stock;  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and, 
resting  on  both  elbows,  dim  and  jin. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece 
down  and  turn  upon  his  left  side,  still  resting 
on  his  left  elbow;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the 
cock  is  opposite  his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting 
on  the  ground;  take  out  a  cartridge  With  the 
right  hand;  Beize  the  small  ef  the  stook  with  this  • 

hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and 
two  first  lingers;   he  will  then  throw  himself  on 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — I>ART   II.        65 

his  back,  still  holding-  the  piece  with  both  hands ; 
carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place  the  butt  between 
the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle  elevated. 
In  this  position,  charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer, 
ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn 
again  upon  his  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and 
prime,  then  raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn 
about,  and  resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on 
throughout  the  squad. 


Lesson  VI. 
Bayonet  Exercise. 

304.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be 
confined  to  two  movements,  the  guard  against 
infantry,  and  the  guard  against  cavalry.  The 
men  will  be  placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  paces 
interval,  and  being  at  shoulder  arms,  the  instruct- 
or will  command : 

1.    Guard  against  Infantry.     2.   Guard. 
One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

305.  (First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the 
right,  turning  on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to 
each  other;    at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece 

vol.  i. — 3 


GG  L  Of  Tin:   BOLDOi — taut  ii. 

Blightly,  Uld   seize   it  with    the   left    hand    above 

and  near  the  tower  band. 

306.  (Second  motion.')  Carry  the  right  foot 
twenty  inches  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  the 
right  heel  on  the  prolongation  of  the  Left,  the 
knees  Blightly  bent,  the  weight  of  the  body  n 
ing  equally  on  both  legs;  lower  the  piece  with 
both  handflj  the  barrel  appermoat,  the  Kit  elbow 
againal  the  body;  seize  the  piece  at  the  bum 
time  with  the  right  liand  at  the  small  of  the 

k.  the  arms  railing  naturally,  the  point  Of  the 

bayonet  Blightly  eleyated. 

Shoulder — Aiims. 
One  tint'  and  arte  motto*. 

307.  Tlirow  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
and  place  it  against  the  right  Bhoulder,  at  the 
same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the 
left,  and  face  to  the  front. 

1.    Quard  against  Cavalry.     2.  (!r.\ni>. 

Om  tinu  and  two  wiariom. 

808.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  g%iard 
against  infantry t  exoept  that  the  right  hand  will 
be  supported  against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet 
held  at  the  height  of  the  i  la  charge  bay- 

onet. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — PART   III.       67 

Shou  Ider — Arms  . 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the 
same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the 
left,  and  face  to  the  front. 


PART  THIRD. 

310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established 
in  the  principles  and  mechanism  of  the  step,  the 
position  of  the  body,  and  the  manual  of  a?'?ns, 
the  instructor  will  unite  eight  men,  at  least,  and 
twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order  to  teach  them  the 
principles  of  alignment,  the  principles  of  the 
touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the  front,  the 
principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  wheeling 
from  a  halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change 
of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will 
place  the  squad  in  one  rank  elbow  to  elbow,  and 
number  the  men  from  right  to  left. 


Lesson  I. 

Alignments. 

311.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  re- 
cruits to  align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order 
the  better  to  make  them  comprehend  the  princi- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER  —  PABT    HI 

pies  of  alignment  ;  to  this  end,  be  will  command 
the  two  men  on  the  right  flank  to  march  two 
i  t lie  front,  and  having  aligned  them,  he 
will  caution  the  remainder  of  the  aqnad  to  move 
up,  as  they  may  be  successively  called,  each  by 
li is  number,  and  align  themselves  successively  on 
the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  num- 
ber, will  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as 
prescribed  in  thefivsl  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and 

will    march    in    <jii<'</,-   tim>    two  I  ,//.//•»/, 

shortening  the  last,  so  as  to  find  himself  about 
six  inches  behind  the  new  alignment,  which  he 

lit  never  to  pass  :  he  will  next  move  up  stead- 
ily by  stops  of  two  or  three  inches,  the  hams  ex- 
tended, to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on 
the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the 
head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  should- 
ers, he  may  find  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his 
neighbor,  whose  elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  with- 
out opening  his  own. 

818.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well 
aligned,  will  command  : 

Pbont, 

314.  At  this,  the  reexnhl  will  turn  eyes  to  the 

front,  and  remain  linn. 

:)15.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed 
on  the  same  principles. 

310.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned 
to  align  themselves  man  by  man,  correctly,  and 
without  groping  or  jostling,  the  instructor  will 
cause  the  entire  rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by 
the  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART   III.       69 

Right  (or  left)— Dress. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men 
placed  in  advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will 
move  up  in  quick  time,  and  place  themselves  on 
the  new  line,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed No.  312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces 
in  front,  and  facing  the  rank,  will  carefully  ob- 
serve that  the  principles  are  followed,  and  then 
pass  to  the  flank  that  has  served  as  the  basis,  to 
verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  num- 
ber of  the  rank  aligned,  will  command  : 

Front. 

320.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this 
or  that  file  forward  or  back,  designating  each 
by  its  number.  The  file  or  files  designated,  only, 
will  slightly  turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to 
judge  how  much  they  ought  to  move  up  or  back, 
steadily  place  themselves  on  the  line,  and  then 
turn  eyes  to  the  front,  without  a  particular  com- 
mand to  that  effect. 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed 
on  the  same  principles,  the  recruits  stepping 
back  a  little  beyond  the  line,  and  then  dressing 
up  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No. 
312,  the  instructor  commanding: 


70       SCHOOL    <>F    THE    SOLDIER — PART    III 

Right  (or  leJt)%ackiDard — Dress. 

o2l\  After  each  alignment,  tlic  inairntrrtnr  will 
examine  the  position  of  the  men,  Mid  cauae  the 
rank  to  come  to  ordered  (inns,  to  prevenl 

much  fatigue,  and  also  the  danger  of  negligi 
at  thouldercd  anus. 


Lesson  II 

323.  The  men  having  learned,  in  the  first  and 
Beeond  part.-,  fee  inarch  with  steadiness  in  oommon 
time,  and  to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and  BwifV- 

in  -s,  will  be  exercised  in  the  tliird  part  only  in 
quick  Etffte,  tl<>ul>lr  quick  tim<\  and  the  run  ;  the 
instructor  will  cause  them  to  execute  successive- 
ly, at  these  different  gaitf,  the  march  to  the  front, 
the  feeing  about  in  marching,  the  march  by  the 
flank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and 
the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 
824.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits 
that  at  the  command  march)  they  will  alu 
move  off  in  quick  time,  unless  this  command 
slmuM  be  preceded  by  that  of  doubL   quick. 

Tu  march  /<>  the  /mnt. 

:;lT>.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by 
the  front,  he  will  place  a  well-instructed  man  on 
the  right  or  the  left,  according  to  the  side  on 

which   he  may  wish    the  guide  to  be,  and  com- 
mand : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — rART   III.        71 


1.   Squad,  forward.     2.    Guide  right,  (or  left.*) 
3.  March. 

326.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step 
off  smartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take 
care  to  march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his 
shoulders  always  in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching 
to  the  front,  that  the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow 
towards  the  side  of  the  guide ;  that  they  do  not 
open  out  the  left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm ;  that 
they  yield  to  pressure  coming  from  the  side  of 
the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming  from  the  oppo- 
site side ;  that  they  recover  by  insensible  degrees 
the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost ;  that  they 
maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  matter 
on  which  side  the  guide  may  be ;  and  if  found 
before  or  behind  the  alignment,  that  the  man  in 
fault  corrects  himself  by  shortening  or  lengthen- 
ing the  step,  by  degrees  almost  insensible. 

328.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits 
to  comprehend  that  the  alignment  can  only  be  pre- 
served, in  marching,  by  the  regularity  of  the  step, 
the  touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  maintenance  of  the 
shoulders  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction ; 
that  if,  for  example,  the  step  of  some  be  longer 
than  that  of  others,  or  if  some  march  faster  than 
others,  a  reparation  of  elbows,  and  a  loss  of  the 
alignment,  would  be  inevitable  ;  that  if  (it  being 
required  that  the  head  should  be  direct  to  the 
front)  they  do  not  strictly  observe  the  touch  of 
elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  for  an  individual  to 
judge  whether  he  marches  abreast  with  his  neigh- 


72     sciiool  of  the  soldier — part  hi. 

bor,  or  not,  and  whether  there  be  not  an  interval 
between  tliom. 

32!).  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  stop  having 
a  tendency  to  make  men  too  easj  and  Jive  in 
their  movements,  the  instructor  will  be  careful  to 
regulate  the  cadence  of  this  step,  and  to  habitu- 
ate them  to  preserve  always  the  erectncss  of  the 
body,  and  the  due  length  of  the  pace. 

330.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  direct  march,  the  instructor  will  ex- 
ercise them  in  marching  obliquely.  The  rank 
being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will 
make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  and  will 
then  march  straight  forward  in  the  new  direction. 
As  trie  men  no  longer  touch  elbows,  they  will 
glance  along  the  shoulders  of  the  nearest  files, 
towards  the  side  to  which  they  are  obliquing,  and 
will  regulate  their  steps  so  that  the  shoulders 
shall  always  be  behind  that  of  their  next  neigh- 
bor on  that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  conceal 
the  heads  of  the  other  men  in  the  rank.  Besides 
this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same  length  of 
pace,  and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

332.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the 
primitive  direction,  will  command  : 


1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will 
make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  (or  right,)  and  all  will 


SCHOOL   OP   THE    SOLDIER — PART   III.        73 

then  march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to 
the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

334.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  ex- 
plained, have  become  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and 
they  shall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of 
the  body,  the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism, 
length,  and  swiftness  of  the  step,  the  instructor 
will  pass  them  from  quick  to  double  quick  time, 
and  the  reverse,  observing  not  to  make  them 
march  obliquely  in  double  quick  time,  till  they 
are  well  established  in  the  cadence  of  this  step. 

335.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

I.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be 
given  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  squad  will  step  off  in  double  quick  time. 
The  men  will  endeavor  to  follow  the  principles 
laid  down  in  the  first  part  of  this  book,  and  to  pre- 
serve the  alignment. 

337.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to 
resume  the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command : 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

338.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be 
given  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  squad  will  retake  the  step  in  quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor 


74   SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

will  halt  it  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
Nos.  98  and  99.  The  command  halt  will  be  given 
an  instant  before  the  foot  is  ready  to  be  placed  on 
the  ground. 

340.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick 
time,  the  instructor  will  occasionally  cause  it  to 
mark  time  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  240. 
The  men  will  then  mark  double  quick  time,  with- 
out altering  the  cadence  of  the  step.  He  will  also 
cause  them  to  pass  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique 
step,  and  reciprocally,  conforming  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  No.  330,  and  following. 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
will  cause  it  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  by 
preceding  the  command  march,  by  double  quick. 

342.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate 
well  the  cadence  of  this  step. 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

343.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick  or 
double  quick  time,  and  the  instructor  should  wish 
to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Squad  right  about.     2.  March. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  recruit  will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  and 
turning  on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear ;  he  will  then 
place  the  right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step 
off  with  the  left  foot. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.   75 


To  march  backwards. 

345.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will 
command  : 

1.   Squad  backward.     2.    Guide  left,  (or  right.') 
3.  March.  . 

346.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the 
means  prescribed  No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watch- 
ful that  the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time 
should  only  be  executed  at  shouldered  arms,  the 
instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  men  too 
much,  and  also  to  prevent  negligence  in  gait  and 
position,  will  halt  the  squad  from  time  to  time, 
and  cause  arms  to  be  ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men 
will  always  carry  their  pieces  on  the  right  shoulder, 
or  at  a  trail.      This  rule  is  general. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  car- 
ried at  a  trail,  he  will  give  the  command  trailarms, 
before  the  command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  con- 
trary, this  command  be  not  given,  the  men  will 
shift  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  com- 
mand double  quick.  In  either  case,  at  the  command 
halt,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  position 
of  shoidder  arms.      This  rule  is  general. 


76       SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART   III. 

Lesson  III. 
The  march  by  the  flank. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly 
aligned,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,right — Face.   2.  Forward.  3.  March. 

352.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the 
rank  will  face  to  the  right  •  the  even  numbered 
men,  after  facing  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to 
the  right  side  of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter 
standing  fast,  so  that  when  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted, the  men  will  be  formed  into  files  of  two  men 
abreast. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step 
off  smartly  with  the  left  foot;  the  files  keeping 
aligned,  and  preserving  their  intervals. 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  word  left, 
for  right,  and  by  inverse  means;  in  this  case,  the 
even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will 
stand  fast,  and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  them- 
selves on  their  left, 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well-instructed 
soldier  by  the  side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  the 
head  of  the  rank,  to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  con- 
duct him  ;  and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit 
to  march  always  elbow' to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

366.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in 
the  march,  by  the  flank,  the  following  rules : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER — PART   III.        77 

That  the  step  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  direct  step. 

Because  these  principles,  without  which  men 
placed  elbow  to  elbow,  in  the  same  rank,  cannot 
preserve  unity  and  harmony  of  movement,  arc  of 
a  more  necessary  observance  in  marching  in  file. 

That  the  head  of  the  man  who  immediately  precedes,  covers 
the  heads  of  all  who  are  in  front ; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which 
each  man  may  maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line 

of  the  file. 

357.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually 
five  or  six  paces  on  the  flank  of  the  rank  marching 
in  file,  to  watch  over  the  execution  of  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  above.  He  will  also  place  himself 
sometimes  in  its  rear,  halt,  and  suffer  it  to  pass 
fifteen  or  twenty  paces,  the  better  to  see  whether 
the  men  cover  each  other  accurately. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank, 
inarching  by  the  flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to 
the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

359.  Atthesecond  command,  the  rank  will  halt, 
and  afterwards  no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may 
have  lost  his  distance.  This  prohibition  is  neces- 
sary, to  habituate  the  men  to  a  constant  preserva- 
tion of  their  distances. 

360.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front 


78        SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    III. 

by  facing  to  the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  and  by  ■  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by 

the  left  flank.  The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the  same 
time  move  quickly  into  their  places,  bo  afl  to  form 
the  squad  again  into  one  rank. 

861.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed 
to  marching  by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause 
them  to  change  direction  by  file;  for  this  purpose, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  By  file  h>ft,  (or  right.)     2.  March. 

362.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will 
change  direction  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing 
a  small  arc  of  a  circle,  and  will  then  march 
straight  forward;  the  two  men  of  this  file,  in 
wheeling,  will  keep  up  the  touch  of  the  elbows, 
and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which  the  wheel  is 
made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four  steps. 
Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the 
same  spot  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad 
to  face  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and 
for  this  purpose  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  by  the  right  (or  left)  flan /.-.     2.  MARCH. 

364.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  a  little  before  either  foot  comes  to  the 
ground,  the  recruits  will  turn  the  body,  plant  the 
foot  that  is  raised  in  the  new  direction,  and  step 
off  with  the  other  foot  without  altering  the  cadence 
of  the  step;  the  men  will  double  or  undouble 
rapidly. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART   III.        79 

365.  If,  in  facing-  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank, 
the  squad  should  face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will 
come  into  one  rank,  agreeably  to  the  principles 
indicated  No.  360.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is 
the  men  who  are  in  rear  who  always  move  up  to 
form  into  single  rank,  and  in  such  manner  as  never 
to  invert  the  order  of  the  numbers  in  the  rank. 

366.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the 
rear,  the  instructor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the 
left  flank,  it  is  the  even  numbers  who  will  double 
by  moving  to  the  left  of  the  odd  numbers;  but  if 
by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  odd  numbers  who  will 
double  to  the  right  of  the  even  numbers. 

367.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will 
be  practiced  with  pieces  at  a  shoulder ;  but  the 
instructor  may,  to  give  relief  by  change,  occasion- 
ally order  support  arms,  and  he  will  require  of  the 
recruits  marching  in  this  position  as  much  regu- 
larity as  in  the  former. 

The  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time. 

368.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank 
in  double  quick  time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick 
time.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands 
prescribed  No.  351,  taking  care  always  to  give 
the  command  double  quick  before  that  of  march. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the 
cadence  of  the  step. 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of 
direction,  and  the  march  by  the  flank,  to  be  exe- 
cuted in  double  quick  time,  by  the  same  com- 
mands, and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as 
in  quick  time. 


v<>       SCHOOL   Of   TIlK   sul.MKR — PART   III. 

371.  The  instructor  will  eause  the  pieces  to  be 
carried  either  on  the  right  shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  tlie 
squad  by  the  flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

■  ll->.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same 
as  in  two  ranks,  and  it  will  always  be  executed  in 
quick  time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands 
prescribed  No.  351,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  cau- 
tion the  squad  not  to  double  files. 

375.  The  instructor  will  be  watch i'ul  that  the 
men  do  not  bend  their  knees  unequally,  which 
would  cause  them  to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men 
in  front,  and  also  to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step 
and  their  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will 
be  executed  in  single  rank.  In  the  changes  of 
direction,  the  leading  man  will  change  direction 
without  altering  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the 
step.  The  instructor  will  recall  to  the  attention 
of  the  men,  that  in  facing  by  the  right  or  left 
flank  in  marching,  they  will  not  double,  but 
march  in  one  rank. 

Lesson  IT. 

WHEELINGS. 

General  principles  of  Wheeling* 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds:  from  halts, 
or  on  fixed  pivots,  and  in  inarch,  or  on  movable 

pivots. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.   81 

378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in 
passing  a  corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the 
order  in  column,  or  from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  place  in  changes 
of  direction  in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement 
is  executed  to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only 
turns  in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes 
steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the 
squad  is  marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time, 
so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is  neces- 
sary, in  order  that  the  subdivisions  of  a  column 
may  change  direction  without  losing  their  dis- 
tances, as  will  be  explained  in  the  school  of  the 
company. 

•  382.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take 
the  full  step  of  tweuty-eight  inches,  or  thirty- 
three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
will  place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the  wheeling 
flank  to  conduct  it,  and  then  command : 

1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.     2.  MARCH. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will 
step  off  with  the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same 
time  the  head  a  little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on 
the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  to  their  left;  the 
pivot-man  will  merely  mark  time  in  gradually 
turning  his  body,  in  order  to  conform  himself  to 


32       SCHOOL    OF    THE   SOLDIER — PART    111. 

the  movement  of  the  marching  ilank  ;  the  man 
who  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps  of  twenty- 
eigHt  inches,  and  from  the  first  step  advance  a 
little  the  left  shoulder,  cast  his  eyes  from  time  to 
time  along  the  rank  and  feel  constantly  the  elbow 
of  the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

385.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  el- 
bow of  the  next  man  towards  the  pivot,  resist 
pressure  coming  from  the  opposite  side,  and  each 
will  conform  himself  to  the  marching  flank — 
shortening  his  step  according  to  his  approxima- 
tion to  the  pivot. 

386.  The  instructor  Mill  make  the  rank  wheel 
round  the  circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in 
order  to  cause  the  principles  to  be  the  better  un- 
derstood, and  he  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre 
does  not  break. 

387.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest 
the  wheel,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Squad.     2.  Halt. 

389.  At  the  second  command)  flu1  rank  will 
halt,  and  n<>  man  stir.  The  instructor,  going  to 
the  flank  opposite  the  pivot,  will  place  the  two 
outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the  direction  he  may 
wish  to  give  to  the  rank,  without  however  dis- 
placing the  pivot,  who  will  conform  the  line  of 
his  shoulders  to  this  direction.  The  instructor 
will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two  men, 
and  the  pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to  con- 
tain the  other  men.      He  will  then  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  III.   83 

i- 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

390.  At  this,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the 
alignment  of  the  two  men  established  as  the  basis, 
in  conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed. 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  command  Front, 
which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  314. 


Remarks  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  from  a 

halt. 


392.  Turn  a  little  the  head  towards  the  marching  flank, 
and  fix  the  eyes  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who 
are  on  that  side  ; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for 
each  man  to  regulate  the  length  of  his  step  so  as 
to  conform  his  own  movement  to  that  of  the 
marchincr  flank. 


Touch  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  loivards  the  pivot ; 

In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  the 
wheel. 


Resist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  side  of  the  marching 
flank  ; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,  the 
pivot,  which  ought  to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels 
from  a  halt,  might  be  pushed  out  of  its  place  by 
pressure. 


84        SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIER — PART  III. 

IVhccling  in  marching,  or  on  a  movable  pivot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to 
execute  well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be 
taught  to  wheel  in  marching.   . 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  inarch, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction  to  the  reverse  flank,  (to  the 
side  opposite  to  the  guide  or  pivot  flank,)  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
rank  is  yet  four  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

396.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will 
be  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt, 
except  that  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain 
towards  the  marching  flank  (or  side  of  the  guide) 
instead  of  the  side  of  the  actual  pivot ;  that  the 
pivot  man,  instead  of  merely  turning  in  his 
place,  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement  of 
the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the 
next  man,  take  stops  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus 
gain  ground  forward  in  describing  a  small  curvt\ 
so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel.  The  middle 
of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As 
soon  as  the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man 
who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  cast  his 
eyes  on  the  ground  over  which  he  will  have  to 
pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor 
will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.   85 


1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

398.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced 
when  four  paces  are  yet  required  to  complete 
the  change  of  direction. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  of  completing  the  wheel,  the 
man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  direct 
himself  straight  forward )  the  pivot  man  and  all 
the  rank  will  retake  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches,  and  bring  the  head  direct  to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide,  in  marching,  will  be  executed  as  fol- 
lows :  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.     2.  MARCH. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
rank  is  yet  four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced 
at  the  instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide 
will  face  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and 
move  forward  in  the  new  direction  without  slack- 
ening or  quickening  the  cadence,  and  without 
shortening  or  lengthening  the  step.  The  whole 
rank  will  promptly  conform  itself  to  the  new  di- 
rection :  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  advance 
the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  take  the  double 
quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in  the  new  direction, 


86   SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
and  retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side, 
in  placing  himself  on  the  alignment  of  the  guide, 
from  whom  he  w^ll  take  the  step,  and  then  re- 
sume the  direct  position  of  the  head,  Kadi  man 
will  thus  arrive  successively  on  the  alignment. 

Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide,  in  double  quick  time. 

403.  When  the  recruits  comprehend  and  exe- 
cute well,  in  quick  time,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and 
in  marching,  and  the  change  of  direction  to  the 
side  of  the  guide,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
same  movements  to  be  repeated  in  double  quick 
time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  commands  and  according  to 
the  same  principles  as  in  quick  time,  except  that 
the  command  double  quick  will  precede  that  of 
march.  In  wheeling  while  marching,  the  pivot 
man  will  take  steps  of  eleven  inches,  and  in  the 
changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
the  men  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide  must  in- 
crease the  gait,  in  order  to  bring  themselves  into 
line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue 
the  recruits,  and  not  to  divide  their  attention, 
will  cause  them  to  execute  the  several  movements 
of  which  this  lesson  is  composed,  first  without 
arms,  and  next,  after  the  mechanism  be  well 
comprehended,  with  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.   87 

m 

Lesson  V. 
Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

406.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed 
the  exercises  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run, 
with  arms  and  knapsacks. 

407.  He  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  exe- 
cuted in  double  quick  time,  both  by  the  front 
and  by  the  flank,  and  by  constant  practice  will 
lead  the  men  to  pass  over  a  distance  of  five  miles 
in  sixty  minutes.  The  pieces  will  be  carried  on 
either  shoulder,  and  sometimes  at  a  trail. 

408.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long 
marches  at  a  run,  the  pieces  carried  at  will  \  the 
men  will  be  instructed  to  keep  as  united  as  pos- 
sible, without,  however,  exacting  much  regularity, 
which  is  impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be 
resorted  to  when  it  may  be  highly  important  to 
reach  a  given  point  with  great  promptitude. 

To  stack  arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

Stack — Arms. 

410.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of 
every  even  numbered  file  will  pass  his  piece  be- 
fore him,  seizing  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the 
upper  band;  will  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance 


SS       SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

of  his  loft  toe,  the  barrel  turned  towards  the 
body,  and  draw  the  rammer  slightly  from  its 
place  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd  numbered 
file  will  also  draw  the  rammer  slightly,  and  pass 
his  piece  to  the  man  next  on  his  left,  who  will 
seize  it  with  the  right  hand  near  the  upper  band, 
and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of  the  right 
toe  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel 
turned  to  the  front ;  he  will  then  cross  the  ram- 
mers of  the  two  pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece 
of  the  odd  numbered  man  being  inside;  the  rear 
rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  also  draw  his 
rammer,  lean  his  piece  forward,  the  lock-plate 
downwards,  advance  the  right  foot  about  six 
inches,  and  insert  the  rammer  between  the  ram- 
mer- and  barrel  of  the  piece  of  his  front  rank 
man ;  with  his  left  hand  he  will  place  the  butt  of 
his  piece  on  the  ground,  thirty-two  inches  in  rear 
of,  and  perpendicular  to,  the  front  rank,  bringing 
back  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left;  the 
front  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  at  the 
same  time  lean  the  stack  to  the  rear,  quit  it  with 
his  right  hand,  and  force  all  the  rammers  down. 
The  stack  being  thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man 
of  every  odd  file  will  pass  his  piece  into  his  left 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  and  inclining  it- 
forward,  will  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

411.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the 
position  of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instruct- 
or will  command : 

1.  Break  ranks.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER PART   III.       89 

To  resume  arms. 

412.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of 
their  stacks,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Take — Arms. 

413.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of 
every  odd  numbered  file  will  withdraw  his  piece 
from  the  stack ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even 
file  will  seize  his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand 
and  that  of  the  man  on  his  right  with  his  right 
hand,  both  above  the  lower  band ;  the  rear  rank 
man  of  the  even  file  will  seize  his  piece  with  the 
right  hand  below  the  lower  band ;  these  two  men 
will  raise  up  the  stack  to  loosen  the  rammers ; 
the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd  file#will  facili- 
tate the  disengagement  of  the  rammers,  if  neces- 
sary, by  drawing  them  out  slightly  with  the  left 
hand,  and  will  receive  his  piece  from  the  hand 
of  the  man  next  on  his  left;  the  four  men  will 
retake  the  position  of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 


END   OP   THE    SCHOOL    OP   THE    SOLDIER. 


TITLE  THIRD. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the 
Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede 
that  by  battalion,  and  the  object  being  to  prepare 
the  soldiers  for  the  higher  school,  the  exercises  of 
detail  by  company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as 
well  in  respect  to  principles,  as  the  order  of  pro- 
gression herein  prescribed. 

2.  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  under- 
going elementary  instruction,  a  captain,  a  cover- 
ing-sergeant, and  a  certain  number  of  file  closers, 
the  whole  posted  in  the  manner  indicated,  Title 
First;  and,  according  to  the  same  Title,  the  officer 
charged  with  the  exercise  of  such  company  will 
herein  be  denominated  the  instructor. 

3.  The  School  of  the  Company  will  be  divided 
into  six  lessons,  and  each  lesson  will  comprehend 
five  articles,  as  follows  : 

Lesson  I. 

1.  To  open  ranks. 

2.  Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

(90) 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY.  91 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  close  ranks. 

"  5.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed 
ranks. 

Lesson  II. 

1.  To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

2.  To  fire  by  company. 
•  3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

5.  To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

Lesson  III. 

1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of 
battle,  and  to  align  it. 

3.  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick 
time,  and  the  back  step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 


Lesson  IV. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

3.  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  to  face  it  to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank, 
to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of 
battle. 


92  HOOL   OF    TUE    COMPANY. 

5.  The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  inarching*. 


Lesson  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at 
a  halt,  or  while  marching, 
li.   To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  me  colamn. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt 
or  marching. 


Lesson  VI. 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the 
company. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause 
them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  exe- 
cute the  movements  incident  thereto. 

1.   Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two 
ranks.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  tiles  to 
be  numbered,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   I.     93 


In  each  rank — Count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each 
rank,  from  right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud 
and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without 
hurry  and  without  turning  the  head,  one,  tioo,  ac- 
cording to  the  place  which  each  one  occupies. 
He  will  also  cause  the  company  to  be  divided 
into  platoons  and  sections,  taking,  care  that  the 
first  platoon  is  always  composed  of  an  even  num- 
ber of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise 
as  possible  in  his  explanations  \  he  will  cause 
faults  of  detail  to  be  rectified  by  the  captain,  to 
whom  he  will  indicate  them,  if  the  captain  should 
not  have  himself  observed  them ;  and  the  in- 
structor will  not  otherwise  interfere,  unless  the 
captain  should  not  well  comprehend,  or  should 
badly  execute  his  intentions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him 
who  commands,  and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the 
first  means  of  order  in  a  body  of  troops,  the  in- 
structor will  labor  to  habituate  the  company  to 
this  essential  quality,  and  will  himself  give  the 
example. 

LESSON  FIRST. 
Article  First. 

To  open  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the 
ranks  and  file  closers  well  aligned,  when  the  in- 


94       SI  BOOL   01   TH1   COMPANY—  i    I. 

structor    shall  wish   to   cause    the   ranks   to    be 
lied,  he  will  direct   the   left  guide  to   place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  which  being 
exceuted,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.    Company,     3.   Shoulder — 

Aii.ms.     4.   T<>  tit,  tear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  ser- 
geant, and  the  left  guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to 
the  rear,  four  paces  from  the  front  rank,  in  order 
to  mark  the  alignment  of  the  real  rank.  They 
will  judge  this  distance  by  the  eye,  without 
counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the 
same  time  on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe 
if  these  two  non-commissioned  officers  are  on  a 
line  parallel  to  the  front  rank,  and,  if  necessary, 
to  correct  their  positions,  which  being  executed, 
he  will  command  : 

5.  March. 

1 1.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand 
fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear  with- 
out counting  the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves 
on  the  alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  conform- 
ing to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear 
rank  on  the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of 
this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   I.     95 

the  same  time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is 
aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seing  the  rear  rank  aligned, 
will  command  : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left 
of  the  rear  rank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file 
closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor 
will  direct  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant 
to  observe  the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and 
to  correct,  if  necessary,  the  positions  of  persons 
and  pieces. 

Article  Second. 
Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will, 
in  the  first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by 
man,  the  better  to  inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four 
men  on  the  right  or  left  of  each  rank  to  march 
two  or  three  paces  forward,  and,  after  having 
aligned  them,  command : 

By  file  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move 
up  successively  on  the  alignment,  each  man  being 
preceded  by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  to- 
wards the  basis,  by  two  paces,  and  having  cor- 
rectly aligned  himself,  will  cast  his  eyes  to  the 
front. 


96     scnooL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  I. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having;  habituated 
the  soldiers  to  dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will 
cause  the  ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  for- 
ward and  backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction 
parallel,  and  sometimes  in  one  oblique,  to  the 
original  direction,  giving,  in  each  case,  two  or 
four  men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment  to  each 
rank.     To  effect  which,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left) — Dress.     2.  Front. 

or 

1.  Right  (or  left)  hack  ward — Dress.   2.  Front. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the 
men  of  the  rear  rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their 
file  leaders,  as  the  sole  object  of  the  exercise  is 
to  teach  them  to  align  themselves  correctly  in 
their  respective  ranks,  in  the  different  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant the  rear  rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will 
place  themselves  on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks 
are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  con- 
form the  line  of  their  shoulders  to  the  new  direc- 
tion of  their  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  on 
the  alignment  as  lias  been  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  317  or  No.  321,  according  as 
the  new  direction  shall  be  in  front  or  rear  of  the 
original  one. 

25.  At  the  cud  of  each  alignment,  the  captain 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  I.      97 

and  the  covering  sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front 
of  the  ranks  to  correct  the  positions  of  persons 
and  arms. 

Article  Third. 
Manual  of  Arms. 

26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  in  a  position  to  see  the  ranks,  and 
will  command  the  manual  of  arms  in  the  follow- 
ing; order : 


'5 


Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 

Raise  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Secure  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Load  in  nine  times. 

27.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  posi- 
tion of  the  body,  of  the  feet,  and  of  the  piece, 
be  always  exact,  and  that  the  times  be  briskly 
executed  and  close  to  the  person. 

VOL.  I. i 


os    school  of  the  rn mp any — lesson  i. 

Article  Fourth. 
To  close  ranks. 

28.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.   Close  order.     2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will 
close  up  in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  him- 
self on  his  file  leader. 

Article  Fifth. 
Alignments j  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  parallel  and  oblique  align- 
ments, by  the  right  and  left,  forward  and  back- 
ward, observing  to  place  always  two  or  four  files 
to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment.  He  will  give 
the  commands  prescribed  No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain 
will  superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  them- 
selves to  judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of  the 
eyes  and  shoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye 
along  the  front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the 
greater  number  of  the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will 
command  Front,  and  rectify,  afterwards,  if  neces- 


school  or  the  company — lesson  i.    99 

sary,  the  alignment  of  the  other  men  by  the 
means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  320.  The  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the 
alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superintended  by 
the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  on  the  flank  to  verify  their  align- 
ment. He  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man 
covers  accurately  his  file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will 
observe  what  is  prescribed  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  pre- 
serve the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor 
will  cause  to  be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men, 
without  deranging  the  alignment,  will  first  cause 
arms  to  be  supported,  or  ordered,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

In  place — Rest. 

38.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer 
be  constrained  to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness 
of  position;  but  they  will  always  keep  one  or 
other  heel  on  the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  rest  the  men  without  constraining  them 
to  preserve  the  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be 
required  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in 
their  places. 


100    SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II. 

41.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall 
judge  proper,  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will 
be  executed  as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 


LESSON  SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if 
stacks  have  been  formed,  and  command  : 

1.  Attention.   2.  Company.  3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and 
firings  to  be  executed  in  the  following  order : 

Article  First. 


To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded 
and  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  251,  and  following.  The  instructor 
will  cause  this  exercise  to  be  often  repeated,  in 
succession,  before  passing  to  loading  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  256.  In  priming  when  loading  in  four  times, 
and  also  at  will,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant 
will  half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face 
to  the  front  when  the  man  next  to  them,  respect- 
ively, brings  his  piece  to  the  shoulder. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II.    101 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to 
cause  the  men,  in  the  different  loadings,  to  exe- 
cute what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  Nos.  257  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and 
consequently  the  one  with  which  it  is  most  import- 
ant to  render  the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  pre- 
ference in  the  exercises  the  moment  the  men  be 
well  established  in  the  principles.  To  these  they 
will  be  brought  by  degrees,  so  that  every  man  may 
be  able  to  load  with  cartridges,  and  to  fire  at  least 
three  rounds  in  a  minute  with  ease  and  regularity. 

Article  Second. 
To  fire  by  company. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire 
by  company  to  be  executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  company.    2.    Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will 
promptly  place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  his 
company,  and  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file 
closers :  the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that 
line,  and  place  himself  opposite  to  his  interval. 
This  rule  is  general,  for  both  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  different  firings. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will 
add:  1.  Company;  2.  Heady;  3.  Aim;  4. 
Fire;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load 


102    SCHOOL  OF  TIIE  COMPANY — LESSON   II. 

their  pieces,  and  then  take  the  position  of  ready, 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence 
the  firing,  by  the  commands : 

1.  Company.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

53.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the 
signal  to  cease  firing  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  simply  observing  to 
pronounce  right  (or  left)  oblique,  before  the  com- 
mand aim. 


Article  Third. 
Tlie  Fire  by  file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by 
file  to  be  executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Company.     3.  Ready.     4. 
Commence  firing. 

56.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier, No.  275,  and  following. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right 
file  of  the  company ;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at 
the  instant  the  first  brings  down  pieces  to  reload, 
and  so  on  to  the  left;  but  this  progression  will 
only  be  observed  in  the  first  discharge,  after  which 
each  man  will  reload  and  fire  without  regulating 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II.    103 

himself  by  others,  conforming  himself  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 

Article  Fourth. 
The   Fire    by   rank. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to 
be  executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.    Company.     3.  Ready. 
4.  Rear  rank — Aim.     5.  Fire.    6.  Load. 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  285,  and  following. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces 
in  the  rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alter- 
nate ranks,  until  the  signal  is  given  to  cease 
firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim 
to  be  taken  to  the  right  and  left,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease, 
whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sound- 
ing the  signal  to  cease  firing,  and  at  the  instant 
this  sound  commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  No.  282. 


104    SCHOOL  OF  TIIE  COMPANY — LESSON  II. 

G4.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always 
followed  by  a  bugle  note,  at  which  sound,  the 
captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  promptly  re- 
sume their  places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  ne- 
cessary, the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is 
used,  the  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  indicated 
by  the  command,  cease  firing,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced by  the  instructor  when  he  wishes  the 
semblance  of  firing  to  cease. 

G6.  The  command  posts  will  be  likewise  sub- 
stituted, under  similar  circumstances,  for  the 
bugle-note  employed  as  the  signal  for  the  return 
of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  to  their 
places  in  line,  which  command  will  be  given  when 
the  instructor  sees  the  men  have  brought  their 
pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most 
frequently  used  against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly 
important  that  it  be  rendered  perfectly  familiar 
to  the  troops.  The  instructor  will,  therefore, 
give  it  almost  exclusive  preference,  and  labor  to 
cause  the  men  to  aim  with  care,  and  always,  if 
possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As  it  is  of 
the  utmost  importance  that  the  men  should  aim 
with  precision  in  battle,  this  principle  will  be 
rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  for  purposes  of 
instruction. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY — LESSON  II.    105 

Article  Fifth. 
To  Fire  by  the  rear  rank* 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires 
to  be  executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear 
rank.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Face  by  the  rear  ranh.     2.    Company,     3. 
About — Face. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step 
out  and  place  himself  near  to  and  facing  the 
right  file  of  his  company ;  the  covering  sergeant, 
and  file  closers,  will  pass  quickly  through  the 
captain's  interval,  and  place  themselves  faced  to 
the  rear,  the  covering  sergeant  a  pace  behind  the 
captain,  and  the  file  closers  two  paces  from  the 
front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,  each 
passing  behind  the  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have 
passed  through  the  interval,  the  company  will 
face  about ;  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  his 
interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the 
front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear 
rank,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the 
fire  by  company,  both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire 
by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  three  preceding 
articles;  the  captain,  covering  sergeant,  and  the 


106    SCHOOL   OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON   II. 

men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like  manner,  to 
what  is  therein  prescribed.  ■ 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left 
of  the  company,  now  .become  the  right.  In  the 
fire  by  rank,  the  firing  will  commence  with  the 
front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.   Face  hy  the  front  rank.     2.    Company.     3. 
About — Face. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  cover- 
ing sergeant  and  file  closers  will  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed  Nos.  69  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  hav- 
ing faced  about,  the  captain  and  covering  ser- 
geant will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress 
on  the  men  the  importance  of  aiming  always  at 
some  particular  object, and  of  holding  the  piece  as 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  178. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  cap- 
tain to  make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands 
aim  and  fire,  to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with 
accuracy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  posi- 
tion to  see  the  two  ranks,  in  order  to  detect 
faults  j  he  will  charge  the  captain  and  file  closers 
to  be  equally  watchful,  and  to  report  to  him  when 
the  ranks  are  at  rest.  He  will  remand,  for  in- 
dividual instruction,  the  men  who  may  be  ob- 
served to  load  badly. 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  sol-  . 


SCHOOL   OP   THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II.    107 

diers,  in  the  firings,  the  highest  degree  of  com- 
posure or  presence  of  mind ;  he  will  neglect  no- 
thing that  may  contribute  to  this  end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men.  as  a  general 
principle,  to  maintain,  in  the  direct  fire,  the  left 
heel  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the  alignment  of 
the  ranks  and  files  may  not  be  deranged ;  and  he 
will  verify,  by  examination,  after  each  exercise 
in  firing,  the  observance  of  this  principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  addition  to 
these  remarks,  all  those  which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges, 
it  is  particularly  recommended  that  the  men  ob- 
serve, in  uncocking,  whether  smoke  escapes  from 
the  tube,  which  is  a  certain  indication  that  the 
piece  has  been  discharged ;  but  if,  on  the  con- 
trary, no  smoke  escapes,  the  soldier,  in  such  case, 
instead  of  re-loading,  will  pick  and  prime  again. 
If,  believing  the  load  to  be  discharged,  the  sol- 
dier should  put  a  second  cartridge  in  his  piece, 
he  ought,  at  least,  to  perceive  it  in  ramming,  by 
the  height  of  the  load;  and  he  would  be  very  cul- 
pable, should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  instructor 
will  always  cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after  firing 
with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault 
has  been  committed  of  putting  three  cartridges, 
without  a  discharge,  in  the  same  piece,  in  which 
case  the  ball  screw  will  be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has 
missed  fire,  that  the  tube  is  found  stopped  up 
with  a  hard,  white,  and  compact  powder;  in  this 
case,  picking  will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new 
cap  substituted  for  the  old  one. 


108    SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III. 

LESSON  THIRD. 

Article  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and 
correctly  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  exercise  it  in  marching  by  the  front,  he  will 
assure  himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  arc  perfectly  in  the  direc- 
tion of  their  respective  rauks,  and  that  the  ser- 
geant accurately  covers  the  captain ;  the  in- 
structor will  then  place  himself  twenty-five  or 
thirty  paces  in  frout  of  them,  face  to  the  rear, 
and  place  himself  exactly  on  the  prolongation  of 

•  the  line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  di- 
recting file,  will  command : 

1.    Company,  f one ard. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated, 
will  move  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  : 
the  instructor,  from  the  position  prescribed,  will 
correctly  align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  directing  file. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be 
charged  with  the  direction,  will,  the  moment  his 
position  is  assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground 
in  the  straight  line  which  would  pass  between 
his  own  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III.    109 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  in- 
structor will  step  aside,  and  command : 

2.  March. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  off  with 
life.  The  directing  sergeant  will  observe,  with 
the  greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of 
the  step,  marching  on  the  two  points  he  has 
chosen ;  he  will  take  in  succession,  and  always  a 
little  before  arriving  at  the  point  nearest  to  him, 
new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the  same  line 
with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some 
fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
captain  will  march  steadily  in  the  trace  of  the 
directing  sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from 
him  ;  the  men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct 
to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neigh- 
bor on  the  side  of  direction,  and  conform  himself 
to  the  principles  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier, 
for  the  march  by  the  front. 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain  will  take 
special  care  not  to  pass  him ;  to  this  end,  he  will 
keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but 
in  the  same  direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual 
distance  of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

To  the — Step. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  to- 
wards the  directing  sergeant,  retake  the  step  from 
him,  and  again  direct  their  eyes  to  the  front. 


110    SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and 
covering  Bergeant  to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the 
right,  and  sometimes  on  the  left  of  the  company. 
"95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having 
the  greatest  influence  on  the  march  of  the  com- 
pany, he  will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his 
step,  his  habit  of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  a  given  line  of  direction,  and  of  pro- 
longing that  line  without  variation. 

90.  If  this  sergeant  should  fail  to  observe  these 
principles,  undulations  in  the  front  of  the  com- 
pany must  necessarily  follow ;  the  men  will  be 
unable  to  contract  the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal 
in  length  and  swiftness,  and  of  maintaining  their 
shoulders  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction — 
the  only  means  of  attaining  perfection  in  the 
march  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to 
establish  the  men  in  the  length  and  cadence  of 
the  step,  and  in  the  principles  of  the  march  in 
line,  will  cause  the  company  to  advance  three  or 
four  hundred  paces,  at  once,  without  halting,  if 
the  ground  will  permit.  In  the  first  exercises, 
he  will  march  the  company  with  open  ranks,  the 
better  to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

98.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all 
the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  are  strictly 
observed ;  he  will  generally  be  on  the  directing 
flank,  in  a  position  to  observe  the  two  ranks,  and 
the  faults  they  may  commit;  he  will  sometimes 
halt  behind  the  directing  file  during  some  thirty 
successive  steps,  in  order  to  judge  whether  the 
directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing  file,  deviate 
from  the  perpendicular. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON   III.    Ill 


Article  Second. 

To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  to  align  it. 

99.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  com- 
pany, will  command  : 

1.    Company.     2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  halt;  the  directiug  sergeant  will  remain  in 
advance,  unless  ordered  to  return  to  the  line  of 
file  closers.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the 
instructor  may  advance  the  first  three  or  four 
files  on  the  side  of  direction,  and  align  the  com- 
pany on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine  himself  to 
causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectified.  In  this 
last  case,  he  will  command  :  Captain,  rectify  the 
alignment.  The  captain  will  direct  the  covering 
sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  when  each, 
glancing  his  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly 
rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  320. 

Article  Third.  ] 
Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle.  \ 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  obliquely,  he  will  command : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 


112    SCHOOL  OF  THE  CO  MIA  NY LESSON   III. 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company 
will  take  the  oblique  step.  The  men  will  accu- 
rately observe  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  331.  The  rear  rank 
men  will  preserve  their  distances,  and  march  in 
rear  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  (or  left)  of 
their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct 
march  to  be  resumed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Martii. 

104.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
resume  the  direct  march.  The  instructor  will 
move  briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain, 
and  facing  the  company,  will  place  himself  ex- 
actly in  the  prolongation  of  the  captain  and  cover- 
ing sergeant;  and  then,  by  a  sign,  will  move  the 
directing  sergeant  on  the  same  line,  if  he  be  not 
already  on  it;  the  latter  will  immediately  take 
two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and 
the  instructor,  and  as  he  advances,  will  take  new 
points  of  direction,  as  is  explained  No.  89. 

105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  bav- 
in- the  touch  of  ellmws,  the  guide  will  always  be 
on  the  side  towards  which  the  oblique  is  made, 
without  any  indication  to  that  effect  being  given; 
and  Avhen  the  direct  march  is  resumed,  the  guide 
will  be,  equally  without  indication,  on  the  side 
where  it  was  previous  to  the  oblique. 

IOC).  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the 
oblique  to  be  made  towards  the  side  of  the  guide. 
He  will  also  direct  the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on 
tie'  directing  sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  III.    113 

.ame  perpendicular  line  to  the  front  with  him, 
fvhile  following  a  parallel  direction. 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the 
instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  follow 
parallel  directions,  in  conforming  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  for 
preserving  the  general  alignment ;  whenever  the 
men  lose  the  alignment,  he  will  be  careful  that 
they  regain  it  by  lengthening  or  shortening  the 
step,  without  altering  the  cadence,  or  changing 
the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front 
of  the  company  and  face  to  it,  in  order  to  regu- 
late the  march  of  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the 
man  who  is  on  the  flank  towards  which  the  ob- 
lique is  made,  and  to  see  that  the  principles  of  the 
march  are  properly  observed,  and  that  the  files 
do  not  crowd. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  back  step. 

-  109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march 
and  in  quick  time,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to 
mark  time,  will  command  : 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 
110.  To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 


114    SCHOOL   OF   THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III. 

111.    To  cause    the    march    in  double  quick 
time,  the  instructor  will  command  : 


1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced 
at  the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume   quick   time;  the   instructor 
will  command : 


1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced 
at  the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  in- 
structor may  cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  step ; 
to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 


1.    Company,  backward.     2.  MARCH. 

11G.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier  No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare, 
the  instructor  will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or 
twenty  steps  to  be  taken  in  succession,  and  to 
that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the 
company  in  marching  in  double  quick  time  till 
the  men  are  well  established  in  the  length  and 

«  ■ 

swiftness  of  the  pace  in  quick  time;  he  will  then 
endeavor  to  render  the  inarch  of  one  hundred  and 


SCHOOL   OP   THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III.    115 

sixty-five  steps  in  the  minute  equally  easy  and 
familiar,  and  also  cause  them  to  observe  the  same 
erectness  of  body,  and  composure  of  mind  as  if 
marching  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if 
a  subdivision  (in  a  column)  has  to  change  direc- 
tion by  turning,  or  has  to  form  into  line,  the  men 
will  quicken  the  pace  to  one  hundred  and  eighty 
steps  in  a  minute.  The  same  swiftness  of  step 
will  be  observed  under  all  circumstances  where 
great  rapidity  of  movement  is  required.  But,  as 
ranks  of  men  cannot  march  any  length  of  time 
at  so  swift  a  rate,  without  breaking  or  confusion, 
this  acceleration  will  not  be  considered  a  pre- 
scribed exercise,  and  accordingly  companies  or 
battalions  will  only  be  habitually  exercised  in  the 
double  quick  time  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five 
steps  in  the  minute. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly 
aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause 
it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.    Company.     2.  About — FACE. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  .the 
directing  file,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed, 

No.  84. 


116    SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON  IIL 

L21.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established 

OD    the  prolongation  of  the    directing   lile,  will 
command :  • 

3.    Comjyany,  fortodrd. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  con- 
form himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  80  and 
87,  with  this  difference — he  will  place  himself 
six  paces  in  front  <>f  the  line  of  file  closers,  now 
leading. 

123.  The  covering  Bergeant  will  step  into  the 
line  of  tile  closers,  opposite  to  his  interval,  and 
the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank, 
now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made, 
the  instructor  will  command : 

4.  March. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  cap- 
tain, and  the  men,  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  89,  and  following. 

L26.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed, 
marching  in  retreat,  all  that  is  prescribed  for 
marching  in  advance ;  the  commands  and  the 
means  of  execution  will  be  the  same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  com- 
pany, will,  when  he  may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to 
the  front  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  119. 
The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  di- 
recting sergeant,  will  resume  their  habitual  pis 
in  line,  the  moment  they  shall  have  faced  about. 

L28.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front 


SCHOOL   OP   THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III.    117 

rank,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  it  to  march  in 
retreat,  he  will  cause  the  right  about  to  be  executed 
while  marching,  and  to  this  effect  will  command  : 

1.    Company.     2.  Right  about.     3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will 
promptly  face  about,  and  recommence  the  march 
by  the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about 
with  the  company,  and  will  move  rapidly  six 
paces  in  front  of  the  file  closers,  and  upon  the 
prolongation  of  the  guide.  The  instructor  will 
place  him  in  the  proper  direction  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  104.  The  captain,  the  covering 
sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  conform  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company 
to  march  by  the  front  rank,  he  will  give  the 
same  commands,  and  will  regulate  the  direction 
of  the  march  by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed 
in  double  quick  time,  all  the  movements  pre- 
scribed in  the  3d,  4th,  5th,  and  6th  lessons  of 
this  school,  with  the  exception  of  the  march 
backwards,  which  will  be  executed  only  in  quick 
time.  He  will  give  the  same  commands,  observing 
to  add  double  quick  before  the  command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right 
shoulder,  in  quick  time,  the  distance  between  the 
ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  there- 
fore, the  instructor  brings  the  company  from  a 
shoulder  to  this  position,  the  rear  rank  must 
shorten  a  little  the  first  steps  in  order  to  gain  the 


118    SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON  IV. 

prescribed  distance,  and  will  lengthen  the  steps, 
on  the  contrary,  in  order  to  close  up  when  the 
pieces  are  again  brought  to  a  shoulder.  In  march- 
ing in  double  quick  time,  the  distance  between 
the  ranks  will  be  twenty- six  inches,  and  the  pieces 
will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  right  shoulder. 
134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men 
will  bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at 
the  command  halt.  The  rear  rank  will  close"  to 
its  proper  distance.      These  rules  are  general. 


LESSON  FOURTH. 

Article  First. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and 
at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause 
it  to  march  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  command: 

1.    Company,  right — Face.     2.  Forward. 
3.  March. 

136.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place 
himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain 
having  stepped  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to 
find  himself  by  the  side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on 
his  left ;  the  front  rank  will  double  as  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  352  \  the 
rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  side-step  to  the 
right  one  pace,  and  double  in  the  same  manner ; 


//* 


I.-f/ 


^31     K! 


J. 

si 

ES 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  IV.    119 

so  that  when  the  movement  is  completed,  the 
files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned,  and 
elbow  to  elbow.    The  intervals  will  be  preserved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side 
step  to  the  right,  so  that  when  the  ranks  are 
formed,  they  will  be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost 
rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company 
will  move  off  briskly  in  quick  time  j  the  covering 
sergeant  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the 
captain  on  his  left,  will  march  straight  forward. 
The  men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast  of  their 
respective  front  rank  men,  heads  direct  to  the 
front ;  the  file  closers  will  march  opposite  their 
places  in  line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles 
of  the  march  by  the  flank  to  be  observed,  in 
placing  himself,  pending  the  march,  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  357. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by 
the  left  flank  to  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands, substituting  left  for  right ;  the  ranks  will 
double  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  for 
the  soldier,  No.  354 ;  the  rear  rank  will  side-step 
to  the  left  one  pace  before  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the 
left,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head 
of  the  front  rank ;  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly 
to  the  left,  and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of 
this  guide ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the 
captain  in  the  front  rank,  the  moment  the  latter 
quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 


120  school  of  the  company — lesson  iv. 

Article  Second. 
To  change  direction  Inj  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank, 
and  cither  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he 
will  command : 

1.  By  file,  left,  (or  right.)     2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will 
wheel ;  if  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the 
latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to 
describe  a  short  arc  of  a  circle/shortening  a  little 
the  first  five  or  six  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to 
the  fourth  man  of  this  file  to  conform  himself  to 
the  movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to  the  side  of 
the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  the  fourth 
man  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement  by 
describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  ex- 
plained. Each  lile  will  come  to  wheel  on  the 
same  ground  where  that  which  preceded  it 
wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  sec  that  the  wheel  be 
executed  according  to  these  principles,  in  order 
that  the  distance  between  the  files  may  always  be 
preserved,  and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hin- 
drance at  the  wheeling  point. 


U0-. 


lie 


is 


urn 


^         fTTT  1 

Q     .rrrri 


m~T~i 

kd  Mill 


9 


□     c 


JD 


EP 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    COMPANY — LESSON  IV.    121 


Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flanh,  and 
to  face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
Nos.  359  and  360.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  un- 
doubted, the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  dis- 
tance. The  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  as 
well  as  the  left  guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left 
flank,  will  return  to  their  habitual  places  in  line 
at  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  com- 
pany by  one  of  the  means  prescribed  No.  100. 

Article  Fourth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form 
it  on  the  right  (or  left)  by  fie  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  On  the  right,  by  fie  into  line.    2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men 
doubled  will  mark  time;   the  captain  and  the 


122   scnooL  OF  THE   COMPANY — LESSON  IV 

covering  sergeant  will  turn  to  the  right,  marcl 
straight  forward,  and  be  halted  by  the  instructor 
when  they  shall  have  passed  at  least  six  paces 
beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
will  direct  the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the  front 
rank  successively  arrive ;  the  covering  sergeant 
will  place  himself  behind  the  captain  at  the  dis- 
tance of  the  rear  rank ;  the  two  men  on  the  right 
of  the  front  rank  doubled  will  continue  to  march, 
and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and  the 
captain,  will  turn  to  the  right ;  after  turning,  they 
will  continue  to  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct 
themselves  towards  the  line  of  battle,  but  when 
they  shall  arrive  at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the 
even  number  will  shorten  the  step  so  that  the  odd 
number  may  precede  him  on  the  line,  the  odd 
number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and  on  the 
left  of  the  captain ;  the  even  number  will  after- 
wards oblique  to  the  left,  and  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  odd  number ;  the  next  two  men  of  the 
front  rank  doubled  will  pass  in  the  same  manner 
behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the  right,  and 
place  themselves,  according  to  the  means  just  exT 
plained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of,  the  two 
men  already  established  on  the  line;  the  remain- 
ing files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and 
be  formed  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner.  The 
rear  rank  doubled  will  execute  the  movement  in 
the  manner  already  explained  for  the  front  rank, 
taking  care  not  to  commence  the  movement  until 
four  men  of  the  front  rank  are  established  on  the 
line  of  battle  ;  the  rear  rank  men,  as  they  arrive 
on  the  line,  will  cover  accurately  their  file  leaders. 


p^ 

.   :   '  Tl 

<2 


*x  V* 


E 


in 


SCHOOL  OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  IV.    123 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left 
flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  form  by  file 
on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  left  for  right.  In  this 
case,  the  odd  numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  so 
that  ^c  even  numbers  may  precede  them  on  the 
line.  ^Ifhe  captain,  placed  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their  places 
in  line  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  instructor,  after 
the  company  shall  be  formed  and  aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  compre- 
hend the  mechanism  of  this  movement,  the  in- 
structor will  at  first  cause  it  to  be  executed  sepa- 
rately by  each  rank  doubled,  and  afterwards  by 
the  two  ranks  united  and  doubled. 

152.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and  without  the  point  where  the 
right  or  left  is  to  rest,  in  order  to  establish  the 
base  of  the  alignment,  and  afterwards  he  will  fol- 
low up  the  movement  to  assure  himself  that  each 
file  conforms  itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  140. 

Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  Hoc, 
a  ad  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in 
marching. 

153.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right 
flank,  the  instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form 
it  into  line;  the  captain  will  immediately  com- 
mand :  1.  By  company,  into  line ;  2.  March. 


124    SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  IV. 

lf>4.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the 
nun  will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  tin4 
double  quick  step,  and  move  into  line,  by  the 
shortest  route,  taking  care  to  undouble  the  files, 
and  to  come  on  the  line  one  after  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive 
in  line  with  the  covering  sergeant,  they  wfll  take 
from  him  the  step,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to  the 
front. 

156.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to 
the  movements  of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but 
without  endeavoring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same 
time  with  the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the 
captain  will  face  to  his  company  in  order  to  follow 
up  the  execution  ;  and,  as  soon  as  the  company  is 
formed,  he  will  command,  guide  lefty  place  him- 
self two  paces  before  the  centre,  face  to  the  front, 
and  take  the  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command  guide  lefty  the  second 
sergeant  will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front 
rank,  on  the  left,  to  serve  as  guide,  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  who  is  on  the  opposite  flank  will  re- 
main there. 

L59.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  left 
flank,  this  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles  ; 
the  company  being  formed,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand guide  right,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  his 
company  as  above;  the  coveiii  i  ant  who  is 

on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  will  serve  as  guide, 
and  the  second  sergeant  placed  on  the  left  flank 
will  remain  there. 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  IV.    125 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  ser- 
geant of  each  company  will  always  be  placed  on 
the  right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  front  rank ; 
they  will  be  denominated  right  guide  and  left 
guide,  and  the  one  or  the  other  charged  with  the 
direction. 

161.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank, 
if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to 
form  platoons,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  effect 
to  the  captain,  who  will  command : 

1.  By  platoon ,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each 
platoon  according  to  the  above  principles.  The 
captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  the  first  lieutenant  before  the 
centre  of  the  second,  passing  through  the  opening 
made  in  the  centre  of  the  company,  if  the  march 
be  by  the  right  flank,  and  around  the  left  of  his 
platoon,  if  the  march  be. by  the  left:  in  this  last 
case,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around  the. left  of 
the  second  platoon,  in  order  to  place  himself  in 
front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieutenant, 
without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command 
guide  left  (or  right)  at  the  instant  their  respective 
platoons  are  formed. 

163>.  At  the  command  guide  left,  (or  right,)  the 
guide  of  each  platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  in- 
dicated flunk  of  the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will 


126    SCHOOL   OF    THE   COMPANY — LESSON  IV. 

serve,  in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second 
platoon. 

165.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will 
be  but  one  guide  to  each  platoon;  he  will  always 
be  placed  on  its  left  flank,  if  the  right  lie  in  front, 
and  on  the  right  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

166.  In  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will 
follow  the  platoons  to  which  they  are  attached. 

167.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  coinpan}-, 
nlarching  by  the  flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by 
platoon,  into  line,  or  by  his  own  direct  commands, 
usinu;  those  prescribed  for  the  captain,  No.  153 
or  161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company 
in  passing,  without  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the 
front,  to  the  march  by  the  flank,  and  reciprocally. 
In  either  case,  he  will  employ  the  commands  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  363,  sub- 
stituting company  for  squad.  The  company  will 
face  to  the  right  or  left,  in  marching,  and  the  cap- 
tain, the  guides,  and  fite  closers  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  each  in  the 
march  by  the  flank,  or  in  the  march  by  the  front 
of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a  subdivision  of  a 
column. 

169.  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in 
marching,  the  company  find  itself  faced  by  the 
rear  rank,  the  captain  will  place  himself  two 
paces  behind  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  now 
in  the  rear,  the  guides  will  pass  to  the  rear  rank, 
now  lead  in-,  and  the  file  closers  will  march  in 
front  of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing 
the  men,  and  to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent 


12?. 


t 


'.J-J..CJ...L  !.i- 


r    r 


E3 


D-E5T 


Disr- 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  V.    127 

in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  will  sometimes 
order  support  arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 


LESSON  FIFTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt 
or  in  inarch. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of 
battle,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  into 
column,  by  platoon  to  the  right,  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.    2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  rapidly  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the 
centres  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant 
passing  around  the  left  of  the  company.  They 
need  not  occupy  themselves  with  dressing,  one 
upon  the  other.  The  covering  sergeant  will  re- 
place the  captain  in  the  front  rank. 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front 
rank  man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right, 
the  covering  sergeant  standing  fast;  the  chief  of 
each  platoon  will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest 
line,  a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  march- 
ing flank  will  rest  when  the  wheel  shall  be  com- 
pleted, face-  to  the  late  rear,  and  place  himself  so 
that  the  line  which  he  forms  with  the  man  on  the 
right,  (who  had  faced,)  shall  be  perpendicular  to 


128   SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    V. 

that  occupied  by  the  company  in  line  of  battle  ; 
i  ach  platoon  will  wheel  according  to  tbe  principles 
prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  when 
the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall 
approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its  chief  will 
command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

1 74.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  man  who  conduct-  the  marching 
flank  shall  have  arrived  at  three  paees  from  the 
perpendicular,  the  platoon  will  halt ;  the  covering 
sergeant  will  move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of 
the  first  platoon  is  to  rest,  passing  by  the  front 
rank;  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself,  in 
like  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second  platoon. 
Each  will  take  care  to  leave  between  himself  and 
the  man  on  the  right  of  his  platoon,  a  space  equal 
to  its  front;  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant  will 
look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align  the  ser- 
geant between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  pla- 
toon who  had  faced  to  the  right. 

17f>.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  es- 
tablished on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will 
place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and 
lacing  towards  him,  will  command: 

3.  Left — Dress. 

17G.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief 
of  platoon  will  command,  Front,  and  place  him- 
self two  paces  before  its  centre. 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselv 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    V.    129 

the  movement  of  their  respective  platoons,  pre- 
serving always  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  same  principles.  The  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in 
the  same  manner  as  if  breaking  by  platoon  to  the 
right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the 
platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform  to  the 
principles  indicated  Nos.  173  and  174. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief 
of  each  platoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right 
of  the  front  rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the 
second  sergeant  near  the  left  of  the  second  pla- 
toon, will  each  move  to  the  points  where  the  right 
of  his  platoon  is  to  rest.  The  chief  of  each  pla- 
toon should  be  careful  to  alis-n  the  sergeant  be- 
tween  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon  who 
had  faced  to  the  left,  and  will  then  command  : 

Right — Dress. 

182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of 
platoon  will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself 
opposite  its  centre. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  com- 
vol.  i. — 5 


130    SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    V. 

pany  by  platoon  to  the  right,  and  to  move  the 
column  forward  after  the  wheel  is  completed,  will 
caution  the  company  to  that  effect,  and  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective 
platoons,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
No.  172,  and  will  remain  in  this  position  during 
the  continuance  of  the  wheel.  The  covering  ser- 
geant will  replace  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  in 
the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to  the  principles 
herein  prescribed ;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  not 
face  to  the  right,  but  will  mark  time,  conforming 
himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank  ; 
and  when  the  man  who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank 
shall  arrive  near  the  perpendicular,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

3.  Forward,     4.  March.     5.    Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed,  the 
platoons  will  move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the 
men  taking  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches.  The 
covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  respective  pla- 
toons, the  former  passing  before  the  front  rank. 
The  leading  guide  will  immediately  take  points 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    COMPANY LESSON    V.    131 

on  the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may  be  in- 
dicated to  him  by  the  instructor. 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should 
lose  his  distance,  or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will 
conform  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  Nos. 
202  and  203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the 
front,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  break  by  pla- 
toon to  the  right  by  the  same  commands.  At  the 
command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the 
manner  already  explained  ;  the  man  on  the  pivot 
will  take  care  to  mark  time  in  his  place,  without 
advancing  or  receding ;  the  instructor,  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  No.  184  and  following. 

190  The  company  may  be  broken  by  pTatoons 
to  the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
by  inverse  means,  the  instructor  giving  the  com- 
mands prescribed  Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting 
left  for  right,  and  reciprocally, 
i  J91-  The  movements  explained  in  Nos.  183  and 
LXJ  will  only  be  executed  after  the  company  has 
become  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  column,  Article  Second  and  Third. 

Remarks. 

192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  com- 
pany, will  observe  whether  the  movement  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above  • 
whether  the  platoons,  after  breaking  into  column' 
are  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  just  occu- 


132    SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    V. 

pied  j  and  whether  the  guide,  who  placed  himself 
where  the  marching  flank  of  his  platoon  had  to 
rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and  the  front  rank 
man  on  the  right,  (or  left,)  the  space  necessary  to 
contain  the  front  of  the  platoon. 

193.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rear- 
most guide  should  not  accurately  cover  the  lead- 
ing one,  he  will  not  seek  to  correct  his  position 
till  the  column  be  put  in  march,  unless  the  in- 
structor, wishing  to  wheel  immediately  into  line, 
should  think  it  necessary  to  rectify  the  direction 
of  the  guides,  which  would  be  executed  as  will  be 
hereinafter  explained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this 
Lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the  man 
on  the  right  (or  left)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the 
command  march,  faces  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  being 
the  true  pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank  man 
next  to  him  ought  to  gain  a  little  ground  to  the 
front  in  wheeling,  so  as  to  clear  the  pivot-man. 

Article  Second. 

To  march  in  column. 

195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon, 
right  (or  left)  in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to 
cause  the  column  to  march,  will  throw  himself 
twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the 
guides,  place  himself  correctly,  on  their  direction, 
and  caution  the  leading  guide  to  take  points  on 
the  ground. 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    V.    133 

of  the  leading  platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between  his 
own  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  in- 
structor will  step  aside,  and  command  : 

1.    Column,  forward.     2.    Guide  left,  (or  right.") 
3.  March. 

198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon ,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides, 
will  lead  off,  by  a  decided  step,  their  respective 
platoons,  in  order  that  the  whole  may  move  smartly, 
and  at  the  same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow 
of  his  neighbor  towards  the  guide,  and  conform 
himself,  in  marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  327.  The  man 
next  to  the  guide,  in  each  platoon,  will  take  care 
never  to  pass  him,  and  also  to  march  always  about 
six  inches  to  the  right  (or  left)  from  him,  in  order 
not  to  push  him  out  of  the  direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the 
greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
step,  and  maintain  the  direction  of  his  march  by 
the  means  prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  leading  one,  preserving  between 
the  latter  and  himself  a  distance  precisely  equal 
to  the  front  of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the 
same  step  with  the  leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from 
the  one  leading,  (which  can  only  happen  by  his 
own  fault,)  he  will  correct  himself  by  slightly 


134    SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V. 

lengthening  or  shortening  a  few  steps,  in  order 
that  there  may  not  be  sudden  quickenings  or 
slackenings  in  the  march  of  his  platoon. 

203.  If  the  same  guide,  having  neglected  to 
march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one, 
find  himself  sensibly  out  of  the  direction,  he  will 
remedy  this  fault  by  advancing  more  or  less  the 
shoulder  opposite  to  the  true  direction,  and  thus, 
in  a  few  steps,  insensibly  regain  it,  without  the 
inconvenience  of  the  oblique  step,  which  would 
cause  a  loss  of  distance.  In  all  cases,  each  chief 
of  platoon  will  cause  it  to  conform  to  the  move- 
ments of  its  guide.  f 

Remarks  on  the  march  in  column. 

204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions 
neglect  to  lead  off  and  to  decide  the  march  from 
the  first  step,  the  march  will  be  begun  in  uncer- 
tainty, which  will  cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step, 
and  a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps, 
the  march  of  his  subdivision,  and  that  which  fol- 
lows, will  be  uncertain  ;  there  will  be  undulations, 
quickenings,  and  slackenings  in  the  march. 

206.  If  the  same  guide  be  not  habituated  to  pro- 
long a  given  direction,  without  deviation,  he  will 
describe  a  crooked  line,  and  the  column  must  wind 
to  conform  itself  to  such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated 
to  march  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he 
will  lose  his  distance  at  every  moment  in  endeavors 
to  regain  the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which  is 


- 


MM     1,1)1111 
!  i     :    i     i    I    I    M    I    I  '! 


A 


i        I  :    i  _■  .  ■    i    '    i  i 
!     M     I  -Ll-l-LlU 


M 


77, 


i>-i"-:t-:.^-^y'..i^..  r:.-f:-r:r.i 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.    135 

the  most  important  principle  in  the  march   in 
column. 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column 
will  be  responsible  for  the  direction,  distance,  and 
step  ;  the  chief  of  the  subdivision,  for  the  order 
and  conformity  of  his  subdivision  with  the  move- 
ments of  the  guide.  Accordingly,  the  chief  will 
frequently  turn,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  sub- 
division. 

209.  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  the 
guides,  will  watch  over  the  execution  of  all  the 
principles  prescribed ;  he  will,  also,  sometimes 
place  himself  in  the  rear,  align  himself  on  the 
guides,  and  halt,  pending  some  thirty  paces  to- 
gether, to  verify  the  accuracy  of  the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always 
repeat,  with  the  greatest  promptitude,  the  com- 
mands march  and  halt,  no  chief  waiting  for  an- 
other, but  each  repeating  the  command  the  mo- 
ment he  catches  it  from  the  instructor.  They  will 
repeat  no  other  command  given  by  him  j  but  will 
explain,  if  necessary,  to  their  subdivisions,  in  an 
under-tone  of  voice,  what  they  will  have  to  exe- 
cute, as  indicated  by  the  commands  of  caution. 

Article  Third. 
To  change  direction. 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while 
marching,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  wheeling  on  the  march. 
Whenever,  therefore,  a  column  is  to  change  direc- 


136    SCHOOL   OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON   V. 

tion,  the  instructor  will  change  the  guide,  if  not 
already  there,  to  the  flank  opposite  the  side  to 
which  the  change  is  to  be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front, 
if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  direc- 
tion  to  the  right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon,  and  immediately  go  him- 
self, or  send  a  marker  to  the  point  at  which  the 
change  of  direction  is  to  be  made  ;  the  instructor, 
or  marker,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of 
the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that  flank 
of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on 
that  person,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may 
just  graze  his  breast.  When  the  leading  guide 
shall  have  approached  near  to  the  marker,  the 
chief  of  his  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Right  wheel.     2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
platoon  is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the 
marker. 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived 
opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  396. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of 
each  platoon  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON  V.     137 

executed  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  Nos.  398  and  399.  The  guide  of  the 
first  platoon  will  take  points  on  the  ground  in 
the  new  direction,  in  order  the  better  to  regulate 
the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it 
will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  re-take  the  direct 
march  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same 
means  which  governed  the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in 
front,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  change  di- 
rection to  the  left,  he  will  command,  guide  right. 
At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  respective  platoons, 
each  passing  in  front  of  his  subdivision;  the  men 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  the 
instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will 
then  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples as  the  change  of  direction  to  the  right,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  com- 
pleted, the  instructor  will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column, 
left  in  front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick 
time,  the  platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  for- 
mations in  line  which  can  be  executed  only  by 


138     SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON  V. 

turning  to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor 
will  sometimes  cause  the  column  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  side  of  the  guide.  In  this  case,  the 
chief  of  the  leading  platoon  will  command  :  Left 
(or  righf)  turn,  instead  of  left  (or  right)  wheel. 
The  subdivisions  will  each  turn,  in  succession, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  No.  402.  The  leading  guide,  as  soon 
as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground, 
the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve 
distances  and  the  direction,  that  all  the  subdivi- 
sions of  the  column  should  change  direction  pre- 
cisely at  the  point  where  the  leading  subdivision 
changed ;  it  is  for  this  reason  that  that  point  ought 
to  be  marked  in  advance,  and  that  it  is  prescribed 
that  the  guides  direct  their  march  on  the  marker, 
also  that  each  chief  of  subdivision  shall  not  cause 
the  change  to  commence  till  the  guide  of  his  sub- 
division has  grazed  the  breast  of  this  marker. 
.  226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdi- 
vision arrives  at  the  point  of  change  in  a  square 
with  the  line  of  direction  :  with  this  view,  he  will 
face  to  his  subdivision  when  the  one  which  pre- 
cedes has  commenced  to  turn  or  to  wheel,  and  he 
will  be  watchful  that  it  continues  to  march 
squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the  point  where  the 
change  of  direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of 
the  subdivision  which  wheels  should  not  clear  the 
wheeling  point,  the  next  subdivision  would  be 
arrested,  and  distances  lost;  for  the  guide  who 
conducts  the  marching  flank  having  to  describe 
an  arc,  in  length  about  a  half  greater  than  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON  V.     139 

front  of  the  subdivision,  the  second  subdivision 
would  be  already  up  with  the  wheeling  point, 
whilst  the  first  which  wheals  has  yet  the  half  of 
its  front  to  execute,  and  hence  would  be  obliged  to 
mark  time  until  that  half  be  executed.  It  is  there- 
fore prescribed  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdivision 
should  take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches  in 
length,  according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in 
order  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  next  subdi- 
vision. The  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  look  well 
to  the  step  of  the  pivot,  and  cause  his  step  to  be 
lengthened  or  shortened,  as  may  be  judged  neces- 
sary. By  the  nature  of  this  movement,  the  centre 
of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little  to  the  rear. 

228.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or 
the  cadence  of  the  st^p,  whether  the  change  of 
direction  be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or  to  the 
opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point, 
will  always  present  his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the 
column.  The  instructor  will  take  the  greatest 
pains  in  causing  the  prescribed  principles  to  be 
observed;  he  will  see  that  each  subdivision  only 
commences  the  change  of  direction  when  the 
guide,  grazing  the  breast  of  the  marker,  has 
nearly  passed^him,  and  that  the  inarching  flank 
does  not  describe  the  arc  of  too  large  a  circle,  in 
order  that  it  may  not  be  thrown  beyond  the  new 
direction. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the 
guide  of  the  wheeling  flank  will  cast  his  eyes 
over  the  ground  at  the  moment  of  commencing  the 
wheel,  and  will  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle,  whose 
radius  is  equal  to  the  front  of  the  subdivision. 


140   school  of  the  company — lesson  v. 

Article  Fourth. 
To  halt  the  column. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Column.     2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will 
halt ;  the  guides  also  will  stand  fast,  although 
they  may  have  lost  both  distance  and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt  be  not  repeated 
with  the  greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the 
same  instant,  distances  will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek 
to  recover  it  after  that  command,  he  will  only 
throw  his  fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if 
he  have  marched  well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his 
proper  distance;  and  if  the'  latter  regain  what 
he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement  will  be  propa- 
gated to  the  rear  of  the  column. 


Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on 
the  march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column, 
right  in  front,  and  wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMrANY — LESSON    V.    141 

battle,  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in 
front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rec- 
tify, if  necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  be- 
yond ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

236.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them  will 
place  himself  briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his 
guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  of  the  platoon 
perpendicularly  to  the  direction  of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon, 
will  command  Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his 
place  in  column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instruct- 
or will  command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wlicel.     2.  March. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on 
the  left  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the 
guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  the  platoons 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheels 
from  a  halt,  and  in  conformity  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his 
platoon  to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the 
marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of 
battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 


142    SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    V. 

240.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  when 
the  marching  flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces 
from  the  line  of  battle. 

241.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having 
halted  it,  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer, 
passing  around  the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  pla- 
toon, will  move  rapidly  to  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle, 
and  command  : 

♦ 
Rlyht — Dress. 

243.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will 
dress  up  on  the  alignment;  the  front  rank  man 
on  the  right  of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds 
himself  opposite  the  instructor  established  on  the 
direction  of  the  guides,  will  place  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  this  officer.  The 
captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  right 
on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain 
will  command  : 

Front. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in 
line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant 
will  cover  the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  re- 
turn to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.    143 

line  of  battle,  he  will  place  himself  at  platoon  dis- 
tance in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him, 
and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide 
beyond  ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank 
man  on  the  right  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the 
right  and  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left 
arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast; 
each  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be 
halted  by  its  chief,  when  the  marching  flank  has 
approached  near  the  line  of  battle ;  for  this  pur- 
pose, the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  when 
the  marching  flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces 
from  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  having  halted  his  platoon,  will  resume 
his  place  in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  pla- 
toon, will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the 
left  of  the  company  will  rest,  and  command : 

Left — Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will 
dress  up  on  the  alignment ;  the  man  on  the  left 
of  the  second  platoon,  opposite  the  instructor, 
will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm 
of  this  officer,  and  the  captain  will  direct  the  align- 


144    SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V. 

lm  nt  from  the  left  on  the  man  on  the  opposite 
lank  of  the  company. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain 
will  command  : 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move 
to  the  right  of  his  company,  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  cover  him,  and  the  left  guide  will  re- 
turn to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command 
left  or  right  dress,  previous  to  commanding  left 
or  right  into  line,  icheel,  unless,  after  rectifying 
the  position  of  the  guides,  it  should  become  ne- 
cessary to  dress  the  platoons,  or  one  of  them, 
laterally  to  the  right  or  left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left 
(or  right)  into  line,  wheel,  will  assure  himself 
that  the  rearmost  platoon  is  at  its  exact  wheeling 
distance  from  the  one  in  front.  This  attention  is 
important,  in  order  to  detect  negligence  on  the 
part  of  guides  in  this  essential  point. 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into 
line  without  halting  the  column,  he  will  give  the 
commands  prescribed  No.  238,  and  move  rapidly 
to  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt 
short,  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   V.    145 

the  platoons  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  239  and  following. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front, 
this  formation  will  be  made  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line 
without  halting  the  column,  and  to  march  the  com- 
pany in  line  to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  platoons  left  wheel.      2.   MARCH. 

261.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt : 
the  man  next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon 
will  mark  time  :  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the 
left,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  wheel 
on  a  fixed  pivot.  When  the  right  of  the  pla- 
toons shall  arrive  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

3.  Forward.  4.  March.  5.  Guide  right,  (or  left.') 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  in- 
stant the  wheel  is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the 
company  will  move  off  together  with  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the 
second  platoon,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left 
guide,  will  take  their  positions  as  in  line  of  battle. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given 
immediately  after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  move 
briskly  to  the  side  on  which  the  guide  is  desig- 
nated. The  non-commissioned  officer  charged  with 


146    BOHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI. 

the  direction  will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  the 
guide,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  line  of  march 
by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribed  No.  10-4.  That 
non-commissioned  officer  will  immediately  take 
points  on  the  ground  as  indicated  in  the  same 
number.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows 
,  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves 
to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line. 

L>04.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a 
column  left  in  front. 


LESSON  SIXTH. 

Article  First. 

To  hreah  the  company  into  platoons,  and  to  re- 
form the  company. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced 
step,  and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column, 
right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  break  by  platoon,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  :  1. 
Break  into  platoons,  and  immediately  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the 
first  lieutenant  will  pass  quickly  around  the  left 
to  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and  give  the  cau- 
tion :  Mark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command  :  2.  March. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march 


r.n 


h 


j~rTT~rrxrj 


:  i  i   i   i   i   .  i   i  i 

i  i 

pT-rri  |  ii  i 

n 

TZ3  s       An 

9 

vr. 

!  J  _  L 

.1J_ 

L1J.L  J_LL  J_1J_LJ_LJ. 

j 

r~ 

1   1   1 

1    1 

i   UJ.L  J.i.l.L  J  J.LJ.L 

SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    VI.    147 

straightforward  ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passing 
by  the  front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be 
disengaged. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  cap- 
tain, the  second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time; 
its  chief  will  immediately  add  :  1.  Right  oblique  ; 
2.  March.  The  last  command  will  be  given  so 
that  this  platoon  may  commence  obliquing  the 
instant  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  platoou  shall 
have  passed.  The  men  will  shorten  the  step  in  ob- 
liquing, so  that  when  the  command  forward  march 
is  given 'the  platoon  may  have  its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  plafoon  being 
near  the  direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the 
chief  of  the  second  will  command  Forward,  and 
add  March,  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  his 
platoon  shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company 
will  break  into  platoons  by  inverse  means,  apply- 
ing to  the  first  platoon  all  that  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  second,  and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  com- 
pany will  shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second 
platoon,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  remain  on 
the  right  of  the  first. 

To  re-form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march, 
right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to 
the  captain,  who  will  command  :    Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain 


148    SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY — LESSON   VI. 

will  immediately  add  :  1.  First  platoon  ;  2.  Right 
oblique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  cau- 
tion it  to  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command :  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  second,  the  first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the 
right,  in  order  to  unmask  the  second  ;  the  cover- 
ing sergeant,  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will 
return  to  the  right  of  the  company,  passing  by 
the  front  rank. 

278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly 
unmasked  the  second,  the  captain  will  command  : 
1.  Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant  the  unmasking 
shall  be  complete,  he  will  add  :  2.  March.  The 
first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark 
time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will 
have  continued  to  march  straight  forward,  and 
when  it  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  Forward,  and  at  the  instant 
the  two  platoons  shall  unite,  add  March  ;  the 
first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  giving  the  command 
Forward,  and  the  captain  adding  the  command 
March,  when  the  platoons  are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its 
right,  will  pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the 
platoon  begins  to  oblique  ;  the  guide  of  the  first,  on 
its  right,  remaining  on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause 
the  company  to  break  and  re-form,  by  platoon,  by 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY — LESSON   VI.    149 

his  own  direct  commands.  In  this  case,  he  will 
give  the  general  commands  prescribed  for  the 
captain  above:  1.  Break  into  platoons;  2. 
March  ;  and  1.  Form  company  ;  2.  March. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  pla- 
toons, the  subdivision  that  breaks  off  should 
mark  time  too  long,  it  might,  in  a  column  of 
many  subdivisions,  arrest  the  march  of  the  fol- 
lowing one,  which  would  cause  a  lengthening  of 
the  column,  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  platoons  which  oblique  should  not 
shorten  the  step  too  much,  in  order  not  to  lose 
distance  in  column,  and  not  to  arrest  the  march 
of  the  following  subdivision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  it 
would  be  obliged  to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite 
flank  to  regain  the  direction,  and  by  the  double 
movement  arrest,  probably,  the  march  of  the  fol- 
lowing subdivision. 

286.  The  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique 
will  face  to  their  platoon's,  in  order  to  enforce  the 
observance  of  the  foregoing  principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies, 
they  break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  im- 
portance that  each  company  should  continue  to 
march  in  the  same  step,  without  shortening  or 
slackening,  whilst  that  which  precedes  breaks, 
although  the  following  company  should  close  up 
on  the  preceding  one.  This  attention  is  essential 
to  guard  against  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  coKmn 
of  a  few  companies,  would  be  serious  in  cor  veni- 
ences  in  a  general  column  of  many  bat'alions. 


150   m  BOOL   01  THl    COMPANY  —  LB880M    vi. 

II.  Q06  the  instructor  will  give   the  gn 
in   causing  all  the   prescribed  prinoipl  -  to  he 
strictly  observed.     To   t his   end,  he   will   hold 
himself  on  the  directing  Hank,  the  better  to  ob- 
serve all  the  movements. 

Article  Second. 

B    it'j  !n  <<>lumn,  to  break  files  to  flu   rea 
to  catui  flu  m  to  n  -•  ni>  r  into  I 

289.  Tl u  company  being  in  maroh,  and  Bup- 
poscd  to  constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column. 

right  (or  left)  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  files  to  break  off,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  turn 
to  his  company,  and  command  : 

1.  Two  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear.  2.  March. 

9 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  tiles  on 
the  hit  (  oi  right )  of  the  company  will  mark  time, 
the  others  will  continue  t"  march  Btraight  for 

ward;  the  two  rear  rank  men  of  these  Giles  will, 
I  In  i  •  ar  rank  of  the  company  shall 
clear  them,  move  to  the  right  by  advancing  the 
outer  shoulder ;  the  odd  cumber  will  place  himself 
behind  the  third  file  from  that  flank,  the  even 

number  behind  the  fourth,  passing  for  this  purpose 
behind  the  odd  number;  the  two  front  rank  men 
will,  in  like  manner,  move  to  the  right  when  the 
rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  the 
odd   number  will  place  himself  behind   the  first 


-P.S3 


IZL.* 1J.J 


a 

9 


•\>    rw 


r    r-T-r-T-r-.T- 


E3- 


U    U    ' 


Emri — .  i  '.l.lj.j.lj^j 

L.I.LJ.J-.  nm 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON   VI.    151 

file,  the  even  number  behind  the  second  file,  pass- 
ing for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number.  If 
the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  the  men  will 
move  to  the  left,  advancing  the  outer  shoulder, 
the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank  will  place  him- 
self behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  number  of  the 
same  rank  behind  the  fourth ;  the  even  number 
of  the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file,  the  odd 
number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  second,  the 
odd  numbers  for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the 
even  numbers.  The  men  will  be  careful  not  to 
lose  their  distances  and  to  keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to 
break  two  files  from  the  same  side,  he  will  give 
the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  proceed  as 
above  directed. 

292.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the 
captain,  the  files  already  broken,  advancing  a 
little  the  outer  shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of 
two  files  to  the  right,  if  the  files  are  broken  from 
the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if  the  files  are  broken 
from  the  right,  shortening,  at  the  same  time,  the 
step,  in  order  to  make  room  between  themselves 
and  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the  files 
last  ordered  to  the  rear ;  the  latter  will  break  by 
the  same  commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  first.  The  men  who  double  should  increase 
the  length  of  the  step,  in  order  to  prevent  dis- 
tances from  being  lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the 
front  of  a  company  by  breaking  off  successive 
groups  of  two  files,  but  the  new  files  must  always 
be  broken  from  the  same  side. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to   cause  files 


152    SCHOOL   OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

broken  off  to  return  into  line,  will  give  the  order 
to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  command  : 

1.    Two  files  into  line.     2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files 
of  those  marching  by  the  flank  will  return  briskly 
into  line,  and  the  others  will  gain  the  space  of 
two  files  by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards 
the  flank  to  which  they  belong. 

296.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to 
watch  the  observance  of  the  principles  which 
have  just  been  prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of 
two  files  to  break  one  after  another,  and  to  return 
again  into  line,  will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three 
groups  to  break  together,  and  for  this  purpose 
will  command  :  Four  or  six  files  from  left  (or 
right)  to  rear;  March.  The  files  designated 
will  mark  time;  each  rank  will  advance  a  little 
the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the 
company  shall  clear  it,  will  oblique  at  once,  and 
each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four  neigh- 
boring files,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  the 
movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group, 
taking  care  that  the  distances  are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain 
to  cause  two  or  three  groups  to  be  brought  into 
line  at  once,  who,  turning  to  the  company,  will 
command : 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

299.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  designated 


SCHOOL   OF    THE   COMPANY — LESSON    VI.    153 

will  advance  the  inner  shoulder,  move  up  and  form 
on  the  flank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear, 
the  guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the 
nearest  front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he 
will  also  open  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered 
into  line. 

301.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  dis- 
posed in  the  following  order  :  the  left  files  as  if  the 
company  was  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and 
the  right  files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by 
the  left  flank.  Consequently,  whenever  there  is 
on  the  right  or  left  of  a  subdivision  a  file  which 
does  not  belong  to  a  group,  it  will  be  broken 
singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  dis- 
tances in  column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated 
in  the  schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movements 
of  this  article  with  precision. 

303.  If  new  files  broken  off"  do  not  step  well  to 
the  left  or  right  in  obliquing;  if,  when  files  are 
ordered  into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with 
promptitude  and  precision,  in  either  case  the  fol- 
lowing files  will  be  arrested  in  their  march,  and 
thereby  cause  the  column  to  be  lengthened  out. 

30-1.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the 
flank  from  which  the  files  are  broken,  to  assure 
himself  of  the  exact  observance  of  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side 
of  direction,  in  order  that  the  whole  company  may 
easily  pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 


L54    SCIIOOL    OF    TUE    COMPANY — LISBON    VI. 


A.BTIOU  Third. 

To  match  th<  column  in  route, and  to  (he 

movementt  incident  thereto, 

oOG.  Tin-  swiftness  of  the  route  Btep  will  be  one 
hundred  and  tin  Btepsio  a  minute;  this  swift; 
will  bo  habitually  maintained  in  columns  in  route, 
whi  d  tin-  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

307.  The  company  being  at  a  haft,  and  sup]       I 
to  constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the 

instructor  shall  W18h  to  cause  it   to  march   in  the 
route  step,  he  will  command: 

1.    Column,  forward.     2.  Guidt  left,  (or  riyht.) 
3.  RouU  Btep.    4.  March. 

:;<|s:.   At  the  command  march,  repeated  bythe 
captain,  the  two  ranks  will  Btep  off  together  j  the 

!•  rank  will  take,  in  marching,  by  shortenin 

few  Bteps,  a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight 
inches)  from  the  rank  preceding,  which  distai 
will  be  computed  from  the  breasts  of  the  men  in 
the  rear  rank,  bo  the  knapsacks  of  the  men  in  the 
front  rank.  The  men,  without  farther  command, 
will  immediately  carry  their  arms  at  loitf,  as  indi- 
cated in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  210.  They 
will  no  Longer  be  required  to  march  in  the  oa- 
denced  pace,  or  with  the  Bame  foot,  or  to  remain 

Bilent.      The  files  Will  march  at  case  ;  but  care  will 

be  taken  to  prevent  the  ranks  from  intermixing, 
the   front    rank   from  getting  in  advance  of*  the 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   VI.    155 

guide,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to    too 
great  a  distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step, 
the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  change  direction, 
which  will  be  executed  without  formal  commands, 
on  a  simple  caution  from  the  captain  •  the  rear 
rank  will  come  up  to  change  direction  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  front  rank.  Each  rank  will  con- 
form itself,  although  in  the  route  step,  to  the  prin- 
ciples which  have  been  prescribed  for  the  change 
in  closed  ranks,  with  this  difference  only :  that  the 
pivot  man,  instead  of  taking  steps  of  nine,  will 
take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear 
the  wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step, 
to  cause  it  to  pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instruc- 
tor will  first  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder,  and  then  command  : 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

oil.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  re- 
sume the  cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to 
leave  a  distance  of  sixteen  inches  between  each 
rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced 
pace,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route 
step,  will  command : 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

313.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  front  rank  will 
continue  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear 
rank  will  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step, 
the  distance  of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  front 
rank  ;   the  men  will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 


156    SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route 
step,  and  the  instructor  should  suppose  the  neces- 
sity of  marching  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, he  will  command : 

1.  Company  ijy  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.  By 
file  left,  (or  right.)     3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  right  (or  left)  in  marching,  the  captain 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who 
conducts  the  leading  flank  :  this  guide  will  wheel 
immediately  to  the  left  or  right;  all -the  files  will 
come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as 
the  guide ;  if  there  be  files  broken  off  to  the  rear, 
they  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  their  respective 
places  and  follow  the  movement  of  the  company. 

316.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company 
to  be  again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in 
increasing  and  diminishing  front,  by  platoon, 
which  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands, 
and  the  same  means,  as  if  the  company  were 
marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  When  the  com- 
pany breaks  into  platoons,  the  chief  of  each  will 
move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  take  the 
place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step  back  into  the 
rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon, 
and  supposed  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  in- 
structor can  cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and 
increased,  by  section,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front 
of  twelve  files  or  more. 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  in- 
creasing front,  by  section,  will  be  executed  accord- 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON   VI.    157 

ing  to  the  principles  indicated  for  the  same  move- 
ments by  platoon.  The  right  sections  of  platoons 
will  be  commanded  by  the  captain  and  first  lieu- 
tenant, respectively ;  the  left  sections,  by  the  two 
next  subalterns  in  rank,  or,  in  their  absence,  by 
sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  sec- 
tion, will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command  : 

1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  March. 

320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken, 
each  chief  of  section  will  place  himself  on  its 
directing  flank  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  guides  who 
will  be  thus  displaced  will  fall  back  into  the  rear 
rank ;  the  file  closers  will  close  up  to  within  one 
pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only 
in  the  column  in  route  :  the  movement  will  never 
be  executed  in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  . 
the  front  of  the  company. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form 
platoons,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  command : 

1.  Form  platoons.    2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  sec- 
tion will  place  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the 
guides  will  pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has 
been  prescribed  for  forming  company.  The  mo- 
ment the  platoons  are  formed,  the  chiefs  of  the 


158    SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

left  sections  will  return   to  their  places  as  file 
closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  be  exe- 
cuted the  diminishing  and  increasing  front  by 
files,  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article,  and  in 
the  same  manner  as  if  marching  in  the  cadenced 
step.  When  the  company  is  broken  into  sections, 
the  subdivisions  must  not  be  reduced  to  a  front  of 
less  than  six  files,  not  counting  the  chief  of  the 
section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or 
by  section,  the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching 
in  the  route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the 
same  direction,  by  the  commands  and  the  means 
indicated,  Nos.  314  and  315.  The  moment  the  sub- 
divisions shall  face  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  the  first 
file  of  each  will  wheel  to  the  left,  (or  right,)  in 
marching,  to  prolong  the  direction,  and  to  unite 
with  the  rear  file  of  the  subdivision  immediately 
preceding.  The  file  closers  will  take  their 
habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  before 
the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

326.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  undouble 
the  files,  which  might  sometimes  be  found  neces- 
sary, he  will  inform  the  captain,  who,  after  causing 
the  cadenced  step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  to  be 
shouldered  or  supported,  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranlcs,  undouble  files.     2.  March. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers 
will  continue  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even 
numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   VI.    159 

the  left  will  place  themselves  promptly  behind  the 
odd  numbers  j  the  rear  rank  will  gain  a  step  to 
the  left  so  as  to  retake  the  touch  of  elbows  on  the 
side  of  the  front  rank. 

328.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left 
flank,  it  will  be  the  even  numbers  who  will  con- 
tinue to  march  forward,  and  the  odd  numbers 
who  will  undouble. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double 
the  files,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks ,  double  files.     2.  MARCH. 

330.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  files  will 
double  in  the  manner  as  explained  when  the  com- 
pany faces  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank.  The  in- 
structor will  afterwards  cause  the  route  step  to  be 
resumed. 

331.  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this 
lesson  may  be  executed  in  double  quick  time. 
The  men  will  be  brought,  by  degrees,  to  pass 
over  at  this  gait  about  eleven  hundred  yards  in 
seven  minutes. 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route 
step  shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the 
command  halt,  and  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will 
be  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner 
they  shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention 
only  to  holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid 
accidents. 


160  school  of  the  company — lesson  vi. 

Article  Fourth. 
Countermarch. 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed 
to  constitute  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  counter- 
march, he  will  command : 

1.    Countermarch.      2.    Company,  right — Face. 
3.  By  file  left.     4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about; 
the  captain  will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company 
and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man, 
to  conduct  him. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will 
stand  fast;  the  company  will  step  off  smartly; 
the  first  file,  conducted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel 
around  the  right  guide  and  direct  its  march  along 
t|ie  front  rank  so  as  to  arrive  behind,  and  two 
paces  from,  the  left  guide;  each  file  will  come  in 
succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  around 
the  right  guide;  the  leading  file  having  arrived  at 
a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  captain  will 
command : 

1.  Company.   2.  Halt.    3.  Front.   4.  Right — 
Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI.    161 

paces  from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to 
rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress 
by  the  right ;  the  captain  will  step  two  paces 
outside  of  the  left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and 
direct  the  alignment,  so  that  the  front  rank  may 
be  enclosed  between  the  two  guides;  the  com- 
pany being  aligned,  he  will  command  Front, 
and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  com- 
pany as  if  in  column ;  the  guides,  passing  along 
the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places, 
on  the  right  and  left  of  that  rank. 

341.  In  a  column,  by  platoon,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands, 
and  according  to  the  same  principles ;  the  guide 
of  each  platoon  will  face  about,  and  its  chief  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  file  on  the  right, 
to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column  left  in  front,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  inverse  commands 
and  means,  but  according  to  the  same  principles. 
Thus,  the  movement  will  be  made  by  the  right 
flank  of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  be  in  front, 
and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front;  in 
both  cases  the  subdivisions  will  wheel  by  file  to 
the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

VOL.  I. — 6 


162  school  of  the  company — lesson  vi. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right 
(or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front, 
being  in  march,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  form 
it  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,"  will  command  : 

1.    On  the  right  into  line.      2.    Guide  right. 

344.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of 
each  platoon  will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank, 
and  the  men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  right ;  the 
column  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second 
command,  will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which 
the  right  of  the  company  ought  to  rest  in  line, 
and  place  himself  facing  the  point  of  direction 
to  the  left  which  he  will  choose. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen 
that  the  guide  of  each  platoon,  after  having 
turned  to  the  right,  may  have  at  least  ten  paces 
to  take  before  arriving  upon  that  line. 

347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly 
opposite  to  the  instructor,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  will  command :  1.  Right  turn ;  and 
when  exactly  opposite  to  that  point,  he  will  add : 

2.  March. 

348.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon 
will  turn  to  the  right,  in  conformity  with  the 


16S. 


.F.24 


-a 


u±*L  1J-JJ 
6 


n 


s 


i  i  i  i  i  i  i  fttt 


I    1    I    I   I    I    1TTT1 


i  i  i i<j 


1" 

[J 
D  i 


r 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI.    163 

principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldiex, 
No.  402.  Its  euide  will  so  direct  his  march  as 
to  bring  the  front  rank  man,  next  on  his  left,  op- 
posite to  the  instructor ;  the  chief  of  the  platoon 
will  march  before  its  centre;  and  when  its  guide 
shall  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt.' 

349.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  the  right  of  the  platoon  shall 
arrive  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle,  the  platoon  will  halt ;  the  files  not 
yet  in  line  will  come  up  promptly.  The  guide  will 
throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon ;  he  will  face 
to  the  instructor,  who  will  align  him  on  the  point 
of  direction  to  the  left.  The  chief  of  platoon 
having,  at  the  same  time,  gone  to  the  point  where 
the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will,  as  soon 
as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in  line, 
command : 

Right — Dress. 

350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  it- 
self; the  front  rank  man,  who  finds  himself  oppo- 
site to  the  guide,  will  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide,  and  the  chief 
of  the  platoon,  from  the  right,  will  direct  the 
alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  oppo- 
site to  the  left  file  of  the  first ;  it  will  then  turn  to 
the  right  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and  march 


164  school  or  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

towards  the  line  of  battle,  its  guide  directing 
himself  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

352.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance 
of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  pla- 
toon will  be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first; 
at  the  instant  it  halts,  its  guide  will  spring  on  the 
line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left 
files  of  his  platoon,  and  will  be  assured  in  his 
position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing 
all  its  files  in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on 
the  direction,  will  command  : 

Right — Dress. 

354.  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  re- 
turn to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around 
the  left;  the  second  platoon  will  dress  up  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first,  and,  when  established, 
the  captain  will  command  : 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

356.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will 
return  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will 
form  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means,  ap- 
plying to  the  second  platoon  what  is  prescribed  for 
the  first,  and  reciprocally.  The  chief  of  the  second 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY LESSON  VI.    165 

platoon  having  aligned  it  from  the  point  of  appui, 
(the  left,)  will  retire  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 
The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  three 
paces  behind  the  line  of  battle,  will  go  to  the 
same  point  to  align  this  platoon,  and  then  com- 
mand :  Front.  At  the  command  guides — posts, 
given  by  the  instructor,  the  captain  will  shift  to 
his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take  their  places 
in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are 
to  be  exercised,  at  the  same  time,  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  the  colonel  will  indicate  the  les- 
son or  lessons  they  are  severally  to  execute. 
The  whole  will  commence  by  a  bugle  signal,  and 
terminate  in  like  manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into 
single  rank,  and  reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks 
in  the  manner  indicated  No.  8,  school  of  the  sol- 
dier, and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column, 
right  or  left  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  single  rank,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.     2.  March. 

360.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide 
will  face  to  the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide 
will  step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of 
the  front  rank. 

362.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  same  time 
with  the  guide ;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to 


166   SCHOOL   OF   THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

the  right  at  the  first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and 
be  himself  followed  by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his 
file,  who  will  come  to  turn  on  the  same  spot  where 
he  had  turned.  The  second  file,  and  successive- 
ly all  the  other  files,  will  step  off  as  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  first,  the  front  rank  man  of 
each  file  following  immediately  the  rear  rank 
man  of  the  file  next  on  his  right.  The  captain 
will  superintend  the  movement,  and  when  the 
last  man  shall  have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt  the 
company,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in 
line  of  battle,  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

364.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two 
ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.    Company 
right — Face.     3.  March. 

365.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  face  to  the  right :  the  right  guide  and  the 
man  on  the  right  will  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

366.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who 
have  faced  to  the  right  will  step  off,  and  form 
files  in  the  following  manner  :  the  second  man 
in  the  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  first  to 
form  the  first  file  ;  the  «third  will  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  first  in  the  front  rank*  the 
fourth  behind  the  third  in  the  rear  rank.  All 
the  others  will,  in  like  manner,  place  themselves, 
alternately,  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and  will 
thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on  the  left  of  those 
already  formed. 

367.  The  formations  above  described  will  be 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI.    167 

habitually  executed  by  the  right  of  companies ; 
but  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  them 
executed  by  the  left,  he  will  face  the  company 
ab&ut,  and  post  the  guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

368.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same 
principles  as  by  the  front  rank ;  the  movement 
commencing  with  the  left  file,  now  become  the 
right,  and  in  each  file  by  the  rear  rank  man,  now 
become  the  front ;  the  left  guide  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  right. 

369.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will 
face  the  company  to  its  proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute 
either  of  the  formations  above  described,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  by  the 
right  or  left  of  companies,  and  will  then  give 
the  commands  just  prescribed  for  the  instructor. 
Each  company  will  execute  the  movement  as  if 
acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  tivo  ranlcs  into 
four ,  and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks, 
at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column, 
right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  four,  ranks,  form  company.  2.  Company 
left — Face.  3.  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to 


168    SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

the  left ;  the  rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of 
one  pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to 
the  left  and  rear,  and  the  men  will  form  into  four 
ranks  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  fde  of 
four  men  will  reface  to  the  front  without  undoub- 
ling.  All  the  other  files  of  four  will  step  off, 
and  closing  successively  to  about  five  inches  of 
the  preceding  file,  will  halt,  and  immediately  face 
to  the  front,  the  men  remaining  doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places 
in  line  of  battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the 
fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  move- 
ment. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two 
ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.  2.  Company 
right — Face.  3.  March,  (or  double  quid- — 
March.) 

377.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
stand  fast,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide 
will  step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the 
front  rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will 
step  off  at  the  same  time,  the  other  files  standing 
fast ;  the  second  file  will  step  off  when  there 
shall  be  between  it  and  the  first  space*  sufficient 
to  form  into  two  ranks.  The  following  files  will 
execute  successively  what  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  second.  As  soon  as  the  last  file  shall  have 
its  distance,  the  instructor  will  command  : 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI.    169 


1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

379.  At  the  command  fronts  the  company  will 
face  to  the  front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks, 
and  marching  to  thjB  front,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Li  four  ranks,  form  company.  2.  By  the 
left,  double  files.  3.  March,  (or  double  quick 
— March.) 

381.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide 
and  the  left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to* 
march  straight  to  the  front :  the  company  will 
make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  the  odd  numbers 
placing  themselves  behind  the  even  numbers. 
The  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will  shorten 
their  steps  a  little,  to  permit  the  odd  numbers  of 
the  front  rank  to  get  between  them  and  the  even 
numbers  of  that  ra*nk.  The  files  thus  formed  of 
fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to  march 
obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as 
to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide;  each 
file  will  close  successively  on  the  file  next  on  its 
left,  and  when  at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file, 
will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  right, 
and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

382.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front 
in  four  ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 


170    SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.  2.  By  the 
right,  undouble  files.  3.  March,  (or  double 
quick — March.) 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide 
and  the  left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to 
march  straight  to  the  front^  the  company  will 
make  a  half  face  to  the  right  and  march  obliquely, 
lengthening  the  step  a  little,  in  order  to  keep,  as 
near  as  possible,  abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon 
as  the  second  file  from  the  left  shall  have  gained 
to  the  right  the  interval  necessary  for  the  left  file 
to  form  into  two  ranks,  the  second  file  will  face 
to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  left  and  march 
straight  forward ;  the  left  file  will  immediately 
form  into  two  ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file  will  execute  suc- 
cessively what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
file  next  to  the  left,  and  each  file  will  form  into 
two  ranks  when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has  ob- 
liqued the  required  distance  and  faced  to  the 
front. 

384.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part 
of  a  column,  left  in  front,  these  different  move- 
ments will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means,  substituting  the 
indication  left  for  right. 


end  or  THE  school  of  the  company. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction. 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be 
subjected  to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  com- 
mander the  means  of  moving  them  in  any  direc- 
tion with  the  greatest  promptitude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements 
should  be  executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in 
closed  ranks,  nor  is  it  desirable,  as  such  exact- 
ness would  materially  interfere  with  their  prompt 
execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear 
the  way  for,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of,  the 
main  corps,  their  movements  should  be  so  regu- 
lated by  this  corps  as  to  keep  it  constantly 
covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a 
reserve,  the  strength  and  composition  of  which 
will  vary  according  to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustain- 
ing distance  of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  re- 
serve will  be  sufficient  for  each  company,  whose 
duty  it  shall  be  to  fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the 
line  with  cartridges,  relieve  the  fatigued,  and 
serve  as  a  rallying-point  for  the  skirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  dis- 
tance, besides  the  company  reserves,  another  re- 
serve will  be  required,  composed  of  entire  com- 
panies, which  will  be  employed  to  sustain  and 
reinforce  such  parts  of  the  line  as  may  be  warmly 

(171) 


172         INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 

attacked  ^this  reserve  should  be  strong  enough 
to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies  deployed  as 
skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserves  should  be  placed  behind  the 
centre  of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  the  company 
reserves  at  one  hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  princi- 
pal reserve  at  four  hundred  paces.  This  rule, 
however,  is  not  invariable.  The  reserves,  while 
holding  themselves  within  sustaining  distance  of 
the  line,  should  be,  as  much  as  possible,  in  posi- 
tion to  afford  each  other  mutual  protection,  and 
must  carefully  profit  by  any  accidents  of  the 
ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the 
enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run 
will  be  resorted  to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  neces- 
sity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their 
pieces  in  the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated 
by  the  sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-com- 
missioned officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  com- 
mands to  be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are  given; 
but  to  avoid  mistakes,  when  the  signals  are  em- 
ployed, they  will  wait  until  the  last  bugle  note  is 
sounded  before  commencing  the  movement. 

12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  ra- 
pidly, the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
will  see  that  the  men  economize  their  strength, 
keep  cool,  and  profit  by  all  the  advantages  which 
the  ground  may  offer  for  cover.    It  is  only  by  this 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         173 

continual  watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all  grades, 
that  a  line  of  skirmishers  can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  be  divided  into  five 
articles,  and  subdivided  as  follows : 

Article  First. 

1.  To  deploy  forward.  § 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

3.  To  extend  intervals. 

4.  To  close  intervals. 

5.  To  relieve  skirmishers. 


Article  Second. 

1.  To  advance  in  line. 

2.  To  retreat  in  line. 
8.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

Article  Third. 

1.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

2.  To  fire  marching. 

Article  Fourth. 

1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction. 

3.  The  assembly. 


174         INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 


Article  Fifth. 

1.  To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmish- 
ers. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that 
the  movements  are  executed  by  a  company  de- 
ployed as  skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of 
the  battalion  in  order  of  battle.  In  the  fifth 
article,  it  is  supposed  that  each  company  of  the 
battalion,  being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  occupies 
a  front  of  one  hundred  paces.  From  these  two 
examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for  all  cases, 
whatever  may  be  the  numerical  strength  of  the 
skirmishers,  and  the  extent  of  ground  they  ought 
to  occupy. 

Article  First. 

Deployments. 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmish- 
ers in  two  ways  :  forward,  and  by  the  flank. 

16.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted 
when  the  company  is  behind  the  line  on  which 
it  is  to  be  established  as  skirmishers  :  it  will  be 
deployed  by  the  flank,  when  it  finds  itself  already 
on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons, 
and  each  platoon  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sec- 
tions; the  comrades  in  battle,  forming  groups  of 
four  men,  will  be  careful  to  know  and  to  sustain 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         175 

each  other.  The  captain  will  assure  himself  that 
the  files  in  the  centre  of  each  platoon  and  section 
are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmish- 
ers on  its  right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other 
named  file  whatsoever.  In  this  manner,  skir- 
mishers may  be  thrown  forward  with  the  greatest 
possible  rapidity  on  any  ground  they  may  be  re- 
quired to  occupy. 

19.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to 
preserve  their  alignment,  but  no  advantages 
which  the  ground  may  present  should  be  sacri- 
ficed to  attain  this  regularity. 

I  20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  denends 
on  the  extent  of  ground  to  be  covered ;  Irat  in 
general,  it  is  not  proper  that  the  groups  of  four 
men  should  be  removed  more  than  forty  paces 
from  each  other.  The  habitual  distance  between 
men  of  the  same  group  in  open  grounds  will  be 
five  paces ;  in  no  case  will  they  lose  sight  of  each 
other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  bat- 
talion comprehends  its  front  and  the  half  of  each 
interval  which  separates  it  from  the  battalion  on 
its  right  and  left.  If  a  line,  whose  wings  are 
not  supported,  should  be  covered  by  skirmishers, 
it  will  be  necessary  either  to  protect  the  flanks 
with  skirmishers,  or  to  extend  them  in  front  of 
the  line  so  far  beyond  the  wings  as  effectually  to 
oppose  any  attempt  which  might  be  made  by  the 
enemy's  skirmishers  to  disturb  the  flanks. 


176         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


To  deploy  forward. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march, 
when  the  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward 
on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the 
second  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  comniand : 

1.  First  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

3.  March,  (or  double  quick — 31  arch.) 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third 
lieutenants  will  place  themselves  rapidly  two 
pace^behind  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left 
sections  of  the  first  platoon;  the  fifth  sergeant 
will^move  one  pace  in  frout  of  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself  between  the 
two  sections  in  the  front  rank  as  soon  as  the 
movement  begins ;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  oh  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  same 
platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass.  The  captain  will 
indicate  to  this  sergeant  the  point  on  which  he 
wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.  The  first  lieu- 
tenant, placing  himself  before  the  centre  of  the 
second  platoon,  will  command  : 

Second  platoon  baclavard — MARCH. 

24.  At  this  comniand,  the  second  platoon  will 
step  three  paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the 
flank  of  the  first  platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted 
by  its  chief,  and  the  second  sergeant  will  place 
himself  on  the  left,  and  the  third  sergeant  on  the 
right  flank  of  this  platoon. 


irs 


1  : 


HiiliaSDfflEI  Sill  I  E  J}  jE  i  I'  I  E 
'    ;   J   j  E 

i    i    i 

i    I    i 

II  I 

I       i  1 

i  in  a  id 


%  0  El  Dj  III  11   1   111  B  I  a 


V- 


I    I   I 

I   I  I 


i  i 


III 


on  II  DC  ID 

pt  m  n:  i  an  mi 


!■ 

•  «  ■  i 


L.    _Z 

WL* 

■ 

■  sum 

a  m 

0  0 

m  i 

i  I)  a 

1  i  i 
■  i  i 

if' 

!  ' ' 
!  •  1 
1 1, ' 
!/! 

0  Si 
,'    i 

1  D 

1      US 

-     •    1     ■ 

1        1 
1        1 

in  in 

1  1 
1  1 
1  1 
1  1 
1  1 
1  1 
/  1 

1  1 

1  1 

1   1 

1  1 

El  B 
1   '   i 

1    '    ' 

1  '   1 
1    '    1 

1  '  1 
!  i 
i  ' 

'  i 

i  i  ; 
i     i 

1  I 


an     !  I      /  >      /  JX 


U'M         on  u 

13  Hu 


!  '  l     EC  miJD 


•WMA^'^f'^ 


INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         177 

25.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of 
four  men,  conducted  by  the  fourth  sergeant,  will 
direct  itself  on  the  point  indicated  j  all  the  other 
groups  of  fours  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left 
shoulder,  will  move  diagonally  to  the  front  in 
double  quick  time,  so  as  to  gain  to  the  right  the 
space  of  twenty  paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance 
between  each  group  and  that  immediately  on  its 
left.  When  the  second  group  from  the  left  shall 
arrive  on  a  line  with  and  twenty  paces  from  the 
first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  conform- 
ing to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  first,  keeping 
constantly  on  the  same  alignment  and  at  twenty 
paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others, 
will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  second;  they  will  arrive  successively  on  the 
line.  The  right  guide  will  arrive  with  the  last 
group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point 
where  the  left  of  the  line  should  rest,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  the  skirmishers  to  halt;  the 
men  composing  each  group  of  fours  will  then  im- 
mediately deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other, 
and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  even  file  in  each  group,  the  rear  rank  men 
placing  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  file  leaders. 
If  any  groups  be  not  in  line  at  the  command  halt, 
they  Will  move  up  rapidly,  conforming  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should 
be  fired  upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause 
the  groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their 
proper  distances. 

28.  The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commis- 


178         INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 

sioned  officers  on  the  right,  left,  and  centre  of  the 
platoon  will  place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of 
the  line,  and  opposite  the  positions  they  respect- 
ively occupied.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will 
promptly  rectify  any  irregularities,  and  then  place 
themselves  twcmty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  rear  of 
the  centre  of  their  sections,  each  having  with  him 
four  men  taken  from  the  reserve,  and  also  a  bu- 
gler, who  will  repeat,  if  necessary,  the  signals 
sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instruct- 
ed to  take  advantage  of  any  cover  which  the 
ground  may  offer,  and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground 
whenever  such  a  movement  is  necessary  to  pro- 
tect them  from  the  fire  of  the  enemy.  Regularity 
in  the  alignment  should  yield  to  this  important 
advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieu- 
tenant will  face  the  second  platoon  about,  and 
march  it  promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  line.  He  will  hold  it  always  at  this 
distance,  unless  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the 
movements  of  the  line.      This  rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  ha- 
bitually in  the  scabbard,  and  this  rule  applies 
equally  to  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve;  when- 
ever bayonets  are  required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular 
signal  will  be  given.  The  captain  will  give  a 
general  superintendence  to  the  whole  deployment, 
and  then  promptly  place  himself  about  eighty 
paces  in  rear  of  the- centre  of  the  line.     He  will 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         179 

have  with  hiin  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken  from 
the  reserve. 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right 
or  the  centre  of  the  platoon,  by  the  same  com- 
mands, substituting  the  indication  right  or  centre, 
for  that  of  left  file. 

34.  The*  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre 
will  be  made  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed above  :  in  this  latter  case  the  centre  of 
the  platoon  will  be  marked  by  the  right  group  of 
fours  in  the  second  section  j  the  fifth  sergeant 
will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group,  and 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  platoon  during  the  de- 
ployment. 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be 
made,  on  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  the  men  in  each 
group  of  fours  will  always*  deploy  at  five  paces 
from  each  other,  and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  even  numbered  file.  The  deployments  will 
habitually  be  made  at  twenty  paces  interval;  but 
if  a  greater  interval  be  required,  it  will  be  indi- 
cated in  the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers, 
so  near  the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  un- 
necessary, the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in 
the  same  manner,  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, as  for  the  deployment  of  a  platoon.  In  this 
case  the  third  lieutenant  will  command  the  fourth 
section,  and  a  non-commissioned  officer  designated 
for  that  purpose,  the  second  section  ;  the  fifth  ser- 
geant will  act  as  centre  guide ;  the  file  closers  will 
place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and 
opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle.     The  first 


is<>      Drasmuonon  FOR  skduushi 

and  second  lieutenant  will  each  have  a  bugler 
near  him. 

To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  cap- 
tain shall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  flank,  holding 
the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command : 

1.  Second  platoon — at  skirmishers.  2.  By  the 
right  jlanl: — take  intervals.  3.  31  arch,  (or 
double  quick — March  | 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third 
lieutenants  will  place  themselves,  respectively, 
two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and 
second  sections  of  the  second  platoon ;  the  fifthser- 
geant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  second  platoon;  the  third  sergeant, 
as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platoon.  The 
captain  will  indicate  to  him  the  point  on  which 
he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.  The  chief  of 
i In  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed Pot  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  Nos. 
23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeanl  will  place  him- 
Belfon  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  ser- 
geant will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

;)!).  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third 
lieutenants  will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind 
the  left  group  of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  marchfihe  second  platoon 
will  face  to  the  right,  and  commence  the  move- 
ment ;  the  left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but 
will  deploy  as  soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right, 


IflQiffliJiB'ilJiMifflinjiiiiiiirwHiima  ir  n  *  jgissiic  i 


QIlIIIfllllfflEIIIIlilBfliMRIinSi'fiJiBIIIIiEj        <ifIS>^= 

am1— 

D  g  03 


HE 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         181 

conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  26 ; 
the  third  sergdant  will  place  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  right  group,  to  conduct  it;  the  second  group 
will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  one  on  its  left, 
the  third  group  at  twenty  paces  from  the  second, 
and  so  on  to  the  right.  As  the  groups  halt,  they 
will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy  as  has  been 
explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular 
attention  to  the  successive  deployments  of  the 
groups,  keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  so 
as  to  rectify  any  errors  which  may  be  committed. 
"When  the  deployment  is  completed,  they  will 
place  themselves  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre 
of  their  sections,  as  has  been  heretofore  prescribed. 
The  non-commissioned  officers  will  also  place 
themselves  as  previously  indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about, 
will  move  it  as  indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left 
flank  according  to  the  same  principles,  substituting 
left  flank  for  right  flank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the 
company  upon  the  centre  of  one  of  the  platoons, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By the right 
and  left  flanks — take  intervals.  3.  March, 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  will  conform  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  No.  38. 


182         INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 

46.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  the 
right  section  of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieu- 
tenant behind  the  right  group  of  the  left  section 
of  the  same  platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section 
will  face  to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to 
the  left,  the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter  sec- 
tion will  stand  fast.  The  two  sections  will  move 
off  in  opposite  directions :  the  third  sergeant  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  file  to  conduct 
it,  the  second  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  left  file. 
The  two  groups  nearest  that  which  stands  fast, 
will  each  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  this  group, 
and  each  of  the  other  groups  will  halt  at  twenty 
paces  from  the  group  which  is  in  rear  of  it.  Each 
group  will  deploy  as  heretofore  prescribed  No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct 
the  movement,  holding  themselves  always  abreast 
of  the  group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to 
be  made  on  any  named  group  whatsoever ;  in  this 
case,  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before 
the  group  indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  be 
made  according  to  the  principles  heretofore  pre- 
scribed. 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed, 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

To  extend  intervals. 

51 .  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend 
a  line  of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  deployments. 


r+s. 


ki 


SB 
as 


Be 

It 


INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         183 

52 .  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers 
is  at  a  halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend 
it  to  the  left,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  extend  inter- 
vals.    2.  March,  (or  double  quick — March.) 

53.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the 
right  will  stand  fast,  all  the  other  groups  will  face 
to  the  left,  and  each  group  "will  extend  its  interval 
to  the  prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated 
No.  40. 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to 
preserve  between  each  other  the  distance  of  five 
paces,  unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should 
render  it  necessary  that  they  should  close  nearer, 
in  order  to  keep  in  sight  of  each  other.  The  inter- 
vals refer  to  the  spaces  between  the  groups,  and 
not  to  the  distances  between  the  men  in  each 
group.  The  intervals  will  be  taken  from  the  right 
or  left  man  of  the  neighboring  group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to 
the  front,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it 
to  the  right,  he  will  command : 

1.    On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces')  extend  inter- 
vals.    2.  March,  (or  double  quick — March.) 

56.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide, 
will  continue  to  march  on  the  point  of  direction ; 
the  other  groups  throwing  forward  the  left 
shoulder,  and  taking  the  double  quick  step,  will 
open  their  intervals  to  the  prescribed  distance,  by 


184         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

the  means  indicated  No.  25,  conforming  also  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre 
of  the  line,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended 
that  one  company  or  platoon  should  occupy  a  line 
which  had  been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the 
men  of  the  company  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire, 
will  fall  successively  to  the  rear  as  they  are  re- 
lieved by  the  extension  of  the  intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  inter- 
vals, will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and 
the  captain  should  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the 
left,  he  will  command  : 

1 .    By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  close  in  tervals. 
2.  March,  (or  double  quick — March.) 

61.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group 
will  stand  fast,  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the 
left  and  close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each 
group  facing  to  the  enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper 
distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the 
captain  will  command  : 

1.    On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  close  inter- 
vals.    2.  March,  (or  double  quick — March.) 


-<* 
1 

Bn 

* 

--< 

-> 

p 

•- 

- 

■ 

i 

s 

• 

b> 

B 

a 

B 

■ 

B 

r 

A 

aril 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.    185 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously 
indicated  ;  the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right 
shoulder,  will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals 
are  reduced  to  the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on 
the  centre,  according  to  the  same  principles.  ' 

65.  Whenmtervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order 
to  reinforce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause 
two  companies  to  cover  the  ground  which  had 
been  previously  occupied  by  one,  the  new  company 
will  deploy  so  as  to  finish  its  movement  at  twenty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men 
will  successively  move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall 
be  unmasked  by  the  men  of  the  old  company.  The 
reserves  of  the  two  companies  will  unite  behind 
the  centre  of  the  line.         ■ 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be 
relieved,  the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  inten- 
tion, which  he  will  immediately  communicate  to 
his  first  and  second  lieutenants. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deploy- 
ment forward,  so  as  to  finish  the  movement  at  about 
twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new 
company,  by  command  of  their  captain,  will  ad- 
vance rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line,  and 
halt;  the  new  line  being  established,  the  old  com- 
pany will  assemble  on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not 
to  get  into  groups  of  fours  until  they  arc  beyond 
the  fire  of  the  enemy. 


186         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

60.  If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  mnrch- 
in  retreat,  the  company  thrown  out  to  relieve 
them  will  deploy  by  the  Hank,  as  prescribed  No. 
.'!v.  and  following.  The  old  skirmishers  will  con- 
tinue to  retire  with  order,  and  having  passed  the 
new  line,  they  will  form  upon  the  reserve. 


Article  Second. 
To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as 
skirmishers  is  marching  by  the  front,  the  guide 
will  be  habitually  in  flic  centre.  Xo  particular 
indication  to  this  effect  need  be  given  in  the  com- 
mands, but  if  on  the  contrary  it  be  intended  that 
the  directing  guide  should  be  on  the  right,  or  left, 
the  command  guide  right,  or  guide  left,  will  be 
given  immediately  after  that  of  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers 
to  advance,  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the 
greatest  rapidity  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and,  in 
case  of  need,  by  the  sergeants.  This  rule  is  gene- 
ral, whether  the  skirmishers  march  by  the  front 
or  by  the  flank. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         187 

73.  At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will 
move  briskly  on  the  line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the 
second  on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  move 
to  the  front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction 
will  move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skir- 
mishers will  hold  themselves  aligned  on  this  guide, 
and  preserve  their  intervals  towards  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  imme- 
diately behind  their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their 
movements. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superin- 
tendence to  the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers, 
he  will  command : 

Halt. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line 
will  halt.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly 
rectify  any  irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  in- 
tervals, and  after  taking  every  possible  advantage 
which  the  ground  may  offer  for  protecting  the  men, 
they,  with  the  three  sergeants  in  the  line,  will  re- 
tire to  their  proper  places  in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skir- 
mishers in  retreat,  will  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March,  (or  double  qmck — 
March.) 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeant? 
will  move  on  the  line  as  prescribed  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will 


188         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

face  about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear, 
conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every 
exertion  to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers  marching  in  re- 
treat; the  captain  will  command  : 


'a 


Halt. 

84.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt, 
and  immediately  face  to  the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides 
will  each  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  78. 

To  change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the 
right,  he  will   command  : 


'ov 


1.  Right  wheel.     2.  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
mark  time  in  his  place ;  the  left  guide  will  move 
in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and,  that  he  may  properly 
regulate  his  movements,  will  occasionally  cast  his 
eyes  to  the  right,  so  as  to  observe  the  direction  of 
the  line,  and  the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  passed 
over.  The  centre  guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle 
to  the  right,  and,  in  order  to  conform  his  move- 
ments to  the  general  direction,  will  take  care  that 
his  steps  are  only  half  the  length  of  the  steps  of 
the  guide  on  the  left. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         189 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of 
their  steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching 
flank,  being  less  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and 
greater  as  they  are  removed  from  it ;  they  will 
often  look  to  the  marching  flank,  so  as  to  preserve 
the  direction  and  their  intervals. 

89.  When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish 
to  resume  the  direct  inarch,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease 
to  wheel,  and  the  skirmishers  will  move  direct  to 
the  front;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point 
which  will  be  indicated  to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line, 
in  place  of  moving  it  to  the  front,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be 
made  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat, 
will  change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by 
the  same  commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  ad- 
vance ;  for  example,  if  the  captain  should  wish  to 
refuse  his  left,  now  become  the  right,  he  will  com- 
mand :  1.  Left  wheel.  2.  March.  At  the  com- 
mand halt,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  cap- 
tain should  wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat, 


190         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

he  will,  when  he  judges  the  line  has.wheeled  suf- 
ficiently, command : 

1.   In  retreat. 
2.  March. 

To  march  by  the  flank. 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishers  to 
march  by  the  right  flank,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank. 
2.  March,  (or  double  quick — March.) 

97.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants 
will  place  themselves  on  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers 
will  face  to  the  right  and  move  off;  the  right 
guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  lead- 
ing man  on  the  right  to  conduct  him,  and  will 
march  on*the  point  indicated;  each  skirmisher 
will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the  direction  of 
the  one  immediately  preceding  him,  and  to  pre- 
serve his  distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the 
left  flank,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right ; 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of 
the  leading  man  to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the 
flank,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  them, 
he  will  command : 

Halt. 


INSTRUCTION   FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         191 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will 
halt  and  face  to  the  enemy.  The  officers  and  ser- 
geants will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  line,  and  be  held  always  about  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in 
position  to  second  its  operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish 
to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command  :  1.  Pla- 
toon forward.  2.  Guide  left.  3.  March.  If  he 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand:  1.  In  retreat.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  right. 
At  the  commatfd  halt,  it  will  reface  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand 
that  the  signals  or  commands,  such  as  forward, 
mean  that  the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the 
enemy;  in  retreat,  that  they  shall  retire;  and  to 
the  right  or  left  flank,  that  the  men  must  face  to 
the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  be  their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the 
flank,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  change  di- 
rection to  the  right,  (or  left,)  he  will  command  : 
1.  By  file  right,  (or  left.)  2.  March.  These 
movements  will  also  be  executed  by  the  signals 
Nos.  14  and  15. 


Article  Third. 

The  firings. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or 
marching. 


192         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

Commence — Firing. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the 
men  of  the  front  rank  will  commence  firing ;  they 
will  reload  rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  in  readi- 
ness to  fire  again.  During  this  time  the  men  of 
the  rear  rank  will  come  to  a  ready,  and  as  soon  as 
their  respective. file  leaders  have  loaded,  they  will 
also  fire  and  reload.  The  men  of  each  file  will 
thus  continue  the  firing,  conforming  to  this  prin- 
ciple, that  the  one  or  the  other  shall  always  have 
his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as 
to  aim  with  accuracy;  they  should,  moreover, 
endeavor  to  estimate  correctly  the  distances  be- 
tween themselves  and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and 
thus  be  enabled  to  deliver  their  fire  with  the 
greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same 
place  whilst  reloading,  unless  protected  by  acci- 
dents in  the  Ground. 


bJ 


To  Jive  marching. 

f  111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
commands  as  the  fire  at  a  halt. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing y  if  the 
line_  be  advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  193 

file  will  halt,  fire,  and  re-load  before  throwing 
himself  forward.  The  rear  rank  man  of  the 
same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  after  pass- 
ing ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank 
man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object, 
and  fire  when  his  front  rank  man  has  loaded ; 
the  fire  will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by  each 
file ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and  en- 
deavor, as  much  as  possible,  to  preserve  the  gen- 
eral direction  of  the  alignment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the 
command  commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of 
every  file  will  halt,  face  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and 
then  re-load  whilst  moving  to  the  rear;  the  rear 
rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march, 
and  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank 
man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready,  and  fire,  when 
his  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat  and 
loaded ;  after  which,  he  will  move  to  the* rear  and 
re-load;  the  front  rank  man  in  his  turn,  after 
marching  briskly  to  the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten  or 
twelve  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the  enemy, 
load  his  piece  and  fire,  conforming  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed ;  the  firing  will  thus  be  continued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  at  the  command,  commence  firing ',  the  front 
rank  man  of  every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step 
one  pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank 
man  will  continue  to  move  forward.  As  soon  as 
the  front  rank  man  has  fired,  he  will  place  himself 
briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  man  and  re-load 
whilst  marching.  When  he  has  loaded,  the  rear 
rank  man  will,  in  his  turn,  step  one  pace  forward, 

vol.  I. — 7 


L(M  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

halt,  and  fire,  and  returning  to' the  ranks,  will 
place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  man  j  the 
latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner, 
observing  the  same  principles.  At  the  command, 
cease  flring,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  re- 
take their  original  positions,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left 
flank,  the  fire  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles,  "but  in  this  case  it  will  be  the 
rear  rank  men  who  will  fire  first. 

116.  The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in 
the  cases  to  which  they  apply : 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst 
marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Forward 
— March,  it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces  are 
loaded,  without  regard  to  the  particular  rank  to 
which  they  belong,  who  will  move  to  the  front. 
Those  men  whose  pieces  have  been  discharged, 
will  remain  in  their  places  to  load  them  before 
moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will  be  continued 
agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  112. 

118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  ad- 
vancing, or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the 
command,  In  retreat — -March,  the  men  whose 
pieces  are  loaded  will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy, 
and  will  fire  in  this  position;  the  men  whose 
pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat  loading  them, 
and  the  fire  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the 
principles  prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either 
at  a  halt,  advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  com- 
mand, By  the  right  (or  left)  flank — March,  the 
men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will  step  one  pace 
out  of  the  general  alignment,  face  to  the  enemy, 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         195 

and  fire  in  this  position ;  the  men  whose  pieces 
are  unloaded  will  face  to  the  right  (or  left)  and 
march  in  the  direction  indicated.  The  men  who 
stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place  themselves, 
immediately  after  firing,  upon  the  general  direc- 
tion, and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank  men, 
as  the  case  may  be.  The  fire  will  be  continued 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  114. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load 
their  pieces  whilst  marching;  but  they  will  be 
enjoined  to  halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the 
act  of  charging  cartridge,  and  priming. 
i  121.  They  should  be  practiced  to  fire  and  load 
kneeling,  lying  down,  and  sitting,  and  much 
liberty  should  be  allowed  in  these  exercises,  in 
order  that  they  may  be  executed  in  the  manner 
found  to  be  most  convenient.  Skirmishers  should 
be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in  whatever  posi- 
tion they  may  load,  it  is  important  that  the  piece 
should  be  placed  upright  before  ramming,  in 
order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder  may  reach 
the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the 
same  rank  should  not  all  fire  at  once,  and  the 
men  of  the  same  file  should  be  particular  that 
one  or  the  other  of  them  be  always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the 
skirmishers  should  seize  on  every  advantage 
which  the  ground  may  present  for  arresting  the 
enemy  as  long  as  possible. 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cease  firing,  the  captain 
will  see  that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed ;  but 
the  men  who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If 
the  line  be  marching,  it  will  continue  the  move- 


196         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

merit ;  but  the  man  of  each  file  who  happens  to 
be  in  front,  will  wait  until  the  man  in  rear  shall 
be  abreast  with  him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advan- 
cing, at  the  command  halt,  the  line  will  re-form 
upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  front;  when  the 
line  is  retreating,  upon  the  skirmishers  who  are 
in  rear. 

126.  Ofiicers  should  watch  with  the  greatest 
possible  vigilance  over  a  line  of  skirmishers ;  in 
battle,  they  should  neither  carry  a  rifle  nor  fowl- 
ing piece.  In  all  the  firings,  they,  as  well  as 
the  sergeants,  should  see  that  order  and  silence 
are  preserved,  and  that  the  skirmishers  do  not 
wander  imprudently ;  they  should  especially  cau- 
tion them  to  be  calm  and  collected ;  not  to  fire 
uutil  they  distinctly  perceive  the  objects  at  which 
they  aim,  and  are  sure  that  those  objects  are 
within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take 
advantage  promptly,  and  with  intelligence,  of  all 
shelter,  and  of  all  accidents  of  the  ground,  to 
conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the  enemy, 
and  to  protect  themselves  from  his  fire.  It  may 
often  happen  that  intervals  are  momentarily  lost 
when  several  men  near  each  other  find  a  common 
shelter;  but  when  they  quit  this  position,  they 
should  immediately  resume  their  intervals  and 
their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may  not,  by 
crowding,  needlessly  expose  themselves  to  the 
fire  of  the  enemy. 


•.  .  ■     .'•     :-  v  ■                                 ■   •: 

29 

:." 

■  ■ 

- 

V;:- 

'-.•;"  :f_"  ,: :"-_.."  ■,t>- '  ■'_<■.; 

■  ■  I  ■ 

■a 

nacB 
1 

yy    i 


Bc 


I, 


■ 


r 


, 


ns  CD 

— * 


-r 


instruction  for  skirmishers.       197 

Article  Fourth, 
the  rally. 

To  form  column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  is 
rallied  in  order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better 
success ;  the  rallies  are  made  at  a  run,  and  with 
bayonets  fixed ;  when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skir- 
mishers fix  bayonets  without  command. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which 
the  chief  of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  cir- 
cumstances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be 
merely  disturbed  by  scattered  horsemen,  it  will 
not  be  necessary  to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but 
the  captain  will  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed.  If 
the  horsemen  should,  however,  advance  to  charge 
the  skirmishers,  the  captain  will  command,  rally 
by  fours.  The  line  will  halt  if  marching,  and 
the  four  men  of  each  group  will  execute  tbis 
rally  in  the  following  manner :  the  front  rank  man 
of  the  even  numbered  file  will  take  the  position 
of  guard  against  cavalry;  the  rear  rank  man  of 
the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take  the  position 
of  guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to 
him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right 
foot  of  the  former,  and  parallel  to  it ;  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man 
of  the  even  file,  will  also  place  themselves  back 
to  back,  taking  a  like  position,  and  between  the 
two  men  already  established,  facing  to  the  right 


198         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRTVIISI1ERS. 

and  left;  the  right  feet  of  the  four  men  will  be 
brought  together,  forming  a  square,  and  serving 
for  mutual  support.  The  four  men  in  each  group 
will  come  to  a  ready,  fire  as  occasion  may  offer, 
and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

130.  The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will 
each  cause  the  four  men  who  constitute  his  guard 
to  form  square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  en- 
able him  and  the  bugler  to  place  themselves  in 
the  centre.  The  three  sergeants  will  each 
promptly  place  himself  in  the  group  nearest 
him  in  the  line  of  skirmishers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these 
squares  too  weak,  but  should  wish  to  hold  his  po- 
sition by  strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command : 


Rally  by  sections. 

132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections 
will  move  rapidly  on  the  centre  group  of  their 
respective  sections,  or  on  any  other  interior  group 
whose  position  might  offer  a  shelter,  or  other  par- 
ticular advantage ;  the  skirmishers  will  collect 
rapidly  at  a  run  on  this  group,  and  without  dis- 
tinction of  numbers.  The  men  composing  the 
group  on  which  the  formation  is  made  will  im- 
mediately form  square,  as  heretofore  explained, 
and  elevate  their  pieces,  the  bayonets  upper- 
most, in  order  to  indicate  the  point  on  which  the 
rally  is  to  be  made.  The  other  skirmishers,  as 
they  arrive,  will  occupy  and  fill  the  open  angular 
spaces  between  these  four  men,  and  successively 
rally  around  this  first  nucleus,  and  in  such  man- 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         199 

ner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact  circle.  The 
skirmishers  will  take,  as  they  arrive,  the  position 
of  charge  bayonet,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  more 
elevated,  and  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  posi- 
tion. The  movement  concluded,  the  two  ex- 
terior ranks  will  fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and 
load  without  moving  their  feet. 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his 
guard  wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  most 
necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particu- 
lar to  observe  that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence, 
and  with  promptitude  aivl  order;  that  some 
pieces  in  each  of  their  subdivisions  be  at  all 
times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  is  directed  on 
those  points  only  where  it  will  be  most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it 
will  form  into  a  circle  around  its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line 
of  skirmishers  formed  of  many  platoons,  should 
judge  that  the  rally  by  section  does  not  offer 
sufficient  resistance,  he  will  cause  the  rally  by 
platoons  to  be  executed,  and  for  this  purpose 
will  command : 

Rally  by  platoons. 

137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same 
means,  as  the  rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of 
platoon  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  chiefs  of  section. 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skir- 
mishers on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 


200         INSTRUCTION   FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move 
briskly  on  the  reserve )  the  officer  who  commands 
it  will  take  immediate  steps  to  form  square ;  for 
this  purpose,  he  will  cause  the  half  sections  on 
the  flanks  to  be  thrown  perpendicularly  to  the 
rear ;  he  will  order  the  men  to  come  to  a  ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking 
the  run,  will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon 
that  man  of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre 
of  the  section.  These  groups  will  direct  them- 
selves diagonally  towards  each  other,  and  in  such 
manner  as  to  form  into  sections  with  the  greatest 
possible  rapidity  while  moving  to  the  rear ;  the 
officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that  this  formation 
is  made  in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs  will  direct 
their  sections  upon  the  reserve,  taking  care  to 
unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left.  As  the  skirmish- 
ers arrive,  they  will  continue  and  complete  the 
formation  of  the  square  begun  by  the  reserve, 
closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without  regard 
to  their  places  in  line ;  they  will  come  to  a  ready 
without  command,  and  fire  upon  the  enemy; 
which  will  also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as 
it  is  unmasked  by  the  skirmishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by 
cavalry  while  retreating,  its  chief  will  command 
halt;  at  this  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly 
into  a  compact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will 
re-form  his  section  and  resume  the  march,  the 
moment  he  can  do  so  with  safety. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt 


INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         201 

and  efficient  manner,  requires  coolness  and  acti- 
vity on  the  part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  mo- 
ment of  respite  which  the  enemy's  cavelry  may 
leave  him  j  as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor 
to  place  himself  beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges, 
cither  by  gaining  a  position  where  he  may  defend 
himself  with  advantage,  or  by  returning  to  the 
corps  to  which  he  belongs.  For  this  purpose, 
being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the  company  to 
break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half  distance ; 
to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  march,  each  platoon 
will  dress  on  its  centre,  and  the  platoon  which 
was  facing  to  the  rear  will  face  about  without 
command.  The  guides  will  place  themselves  on 
the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  platoons, 
those  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves 
at  half  distance  from  those  of  the  first',  counting 
from  the  rear  rank.  These  dispositions  being 
made,  the  captain  can  move  the  column  in  what- 
ever direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he 
will  command : 

1.  In  retreat.    2.  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will 
immediately  face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in 


202         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

the  opposite  direction.     As  soon  as  the  column 
is  in  motion,  the  captain  will  command : 

3.    Guide  right,  (or  left.} 

147..  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  lead- 
ing guide  ;  the  guides  will  march  at  their  proper 
distances,  and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will 
halt ;  the  first  platoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and 
the  outer  half  sections  .of  each  platoon  will  be 
thrown  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form 
the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the  square.  The 
officers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify  any 
irregularities  which  may  be  committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column 
in  advance,  the  captain  will  command : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  MARcn. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  144. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain 
will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March,  (or  double  quick — 
March.)     3.   Guide  left,  (or  right.) 

153.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         203 

move  forward,  and  at  the  third  command,  the 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to 
gain  ground  to  the  right  or  left,  he  will  do  so  by 
rapid  wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and 
for  this  purpose,  will  change  the  guide  whenever 
it  may  be  necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon, 
at  half  distance,  right  in  front,  the  captain  can 
deploy  the  first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the 
means  already  explained ;  but  if  it  should  be  his 
wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon  forward  on  the 
centre  file,  leaving  the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  On  the 
centre  file — take  intervals.  3.  March,  (or 
double  quick — March.) 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  will  caution  his  platoon  to  stand  fast ; 
the  chiefs  of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will 
place  thenselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sec- 
tions ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one 
pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  commaud,  the  chief  of  the 
right  section,  second  platoon,  will  command  : 
Section  right  face  ;  the  chief  of  the  left  section  : 
Section  left  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will 
move  off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having 
unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections 
will  respectively  command  :  By  the  left  flank — 


204         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

March,  and  By  the  right  flank — March;  and 
as  soon  as  these  sections  arrive  on  the  alignment 
of  the  first  platoon,  they  will  command  :  As  skir- 
mishers— March.  The  groups  will  then  deploy 
according  to  prescribed  principles,  on  the  right 
group  of  the  left  section,  which  will  be  directed 
by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the  point  indicated. 

159.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deploy- 
ment made  by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will 
be  moved  to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated, 
and  halted  after  passing  some  steps  beyond  the 
alignment  of  the  first  platoon ;  the  deployment 
will  then  be  made  by  the  flank  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed 
as  skirmishers,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to 
rally  them  on  the  battalion,  he  will  command : 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

161.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the 
reserve,  no  matter  what  position  the  company  to 
which  they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle, 
will  rapidly  unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion, 
directing  themselves  in  a  run  towards  its  nearest 
flank,  and  then  form  in  its  rear. 

162.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed 
beyond  the  line  of  file  closers,  the  men  will  take 
the  quick  step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or 
section  will  re-form  his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in 
column  behind  the  wing  on  which  it  is  rallied,  and 
at  ten  paces  from  the  rank  of  file  closers.  These 
subdivisions  will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  of 
the  commander  of  the  battalion,  who  may,  if  he 


'       INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         205 

thinks  proper,  throw  them  into  line  of  battle  at 
the  extremities  of  the  line,  or  in  the  intervals 
between  the  battalions. 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind 
the  same  wing  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter 
whatsoever,  they  should  be  formed  always  into 
close  column,  or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  com- 
pany of  skirmishers,  shall  be  formed  into  square, 
the  platoons  and  sections  of  the  covering  company 
will  be  directed  by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the 
square,  which  will  be  opened  at  the  angles  to  re- 
ceive the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then  formed 
into  close  column  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  first 
front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  an- 
gles of  the  square  from  being  opened,  the  skir- 
mishers will  throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the 
front  rank  men,  the  right  knee  on  the  ground, 
the  butt  of  the  piece  resting  on  the  thigh,  the 
bayonet  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may 
also  place  themselves  about  the  angles,  where 
they  can  render  good  service  by  defending  the 
sectors  without  fire. 

166.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers 
are  rallied  be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the 
skirmishers  will  be  formed  into  close  column  by 
platoon,  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  third  division, 
and  at  the  command,  Form  square — March,  they 
will  move  forward  and  close  on  the  buglers. 

167.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by 
platoon  or  section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion, 
and  it  be  wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the 
front,  they  will  be  marched  by  the  flank  towards 


200         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

the  intervals  on  the  wings,  and  be  then  deployed 
so  as  to  cover  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the 
interior  of  squares  or  columns,  are  to  be  deployed, 
they  will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then 
thrown  forward,  as  is  prescribed,  No.  157 ;  as 
soon  as  they  shall  have  unmasked  the  column  or 
square,  they  will  be  deployed,  the  one  on  the 
right,  the  other  on  the  left  file. 

The  assembly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will 
be  assembled  when  there  is  no  longer  danger  of 
its  being  disturbed ;  the  assembly  will  be  made 
habitually  in  quick  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the 
skirmishers  on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 

Assemble  on  the  reserve. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  as- 
semble by  groups  of  fours ;  the  front  rank  men 
will  place  themselves  behind  their  rear  rank  men ; 
and  each  group  of  fours  will  direct  itself  on  the 
reserve,  where  each  will  take  its  proper  place  in 
the  ranks.  When  the  company  is  re-formed,  it 
will  rejoin  the  battalion  to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  maybe  also  proper  to  assemble  the 
skirmishers  on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left 
of  the  line,  either  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble 
"them  on  the  centre  while  marching,  he  will  com- 

niiiiid : 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.         207 


Assemble  on  the  centre. 

174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will 
continue  to  march'  directly  to  the  front  on  the 
point  indicated  •  the  front  rank  man  of  the  direct- 
ing file  will  follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by 
his  rear  rank  man  ;  the  other  two  comrades  of 
this  group,  and  likewise  those  on  their  left,  will 
march  diagonally,  advancing  the  left  shoulder 
and  accelerating  the  gait,  so  as  to  re-form  the 
groups  while  drawing  nearer  and  nearer  the  di- 
recting file ;  the  men  of  the  right  section  will 
unite  in  the  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then 
upon  the  directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right 
shoulder.  As  they  successively  unite  on  the 
centre,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the 
right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  re- 
treat will  also  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  the  front  rank  men  marching  behind 
their  rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a 
halt,  and  on  the  line  they  occupy,  the  captain  will 
give  the  same  commands;  the  skirmishers  will 
face  to  the  right  or  left,  according  as  they  should 
march  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  re-form  the 
groups  while  marching,  and  thus  arrive  on  the 
file  which  served  as  the  point  of  formation.  As 
they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmishers  will  sup- 
port arms. 


20g       instruction  for  skirmishers. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers,  and  to  rally 
this  battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the 
commander  should  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right 
of  the  sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right 
companies  in  reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention 
to  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant,  and  also  to 
the  major,  who  will  be  directed  to  take  charge  of 
the  reserve.  He  will  point  out  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  the  direction  he  wishes  to  give  the  line, 
as  well  as  the  point  where  he  wishes  the  right  of 
the  sixth  company  to  rest,  and  to  the  commander 
of  the  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish  it  established. 

179.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly 
in  front  of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and 
the  adjutant  in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  com- 
pany. The  commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose 
of  it  in  the  manner  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  platoons — as  skirmisha's. 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — take 
intervals. 

3.  March,  (or  double  quick — March.) 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of 
the  fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  prepare  to  do- 


! 


m  rj 


\\ Li  1 


I 


IT 

n 

i.i  i. 


m 


INSTRUCTION    EOR    SKIRMISHERS.         209 

ploy  the  first  platoons  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies, the  sixth  on  its  right,  the  fifth  on  its  left 
file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will 
face  it  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh 
and  eighth  companies  will  face  their  respective 
companies  to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement 
will  commence.  The  platoons  of  the  fifth  and 
sixth  companies  will  deploy  forward ;  the  right 
guide  of  the  sixth  will  march  on  the  point  which 
will  be  indicated  to  him  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

184.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right, 
and  also  the  companies  which  have  faced  to  the 
left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The  fourth 
company  will  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred 
paces  counting  from  the  left  of  the  fifth,  and  its 
chief  will  deploy  its  first  platoon  on  its  left  file. 
The  seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  each  take 
an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces,  counting  from 
the  first  file  of  the  company,  which  is  immediately 
on  its  right;  and  the  chiefs  of  these  companies 
will  afterwards  deploy  their  first  platoons  on  the 
right  file. 

185.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which 
the  deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  di- 
rect themselves  towards  the  outer  man  of  the 
neighboring  company,  already  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers ;  or  if  the  company  has  not  finished  its 
deployment,  they  will  judge  carefully  the  distance 
which  may  still  be  required  to  place  all  these  files 
in  line,  and  will  then  march  on  the  point  thus 
marked  out.   The  companies,  as  they  arrive  on  the 


210         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

line,  will  align  themselves  on  those  already  de- 
ployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will 
follow  the  deployment,  the  one  on  the  right,  the 
other  on  the  left;  the  movement  concluded,  they 
will  place  themselves  near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  estab- 
lished in  echellon  in  the  following  manner:  the 
reserve  of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  this 
company;  the  reserves  of  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies,  united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their 
line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  in  advance 
of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company ;  the  reserves 
of  the  seventh  and  eighth  companies,  also  united, 
opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers, 
and  thirty  paces  farther  to  the  rear  than  the  re- 
serve of  the  sixth  company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  com- 
posing the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the 
colonel  to  that  effect,  will  march  these  companies 
thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them 
into  column  by  company,  at  half  distance ;  after 
which,  he  will  conduct  the  column  to  the  point 
which  shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superin- 
tendence of  the  movement;  and  when  it  is  finished, 
will  move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence 
his  view  may  best  embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order 
to  direct  their, movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  de- 
sired to  deploy  by  the  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth 
companies  will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or 
twelve  paces,  halted,  and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  211 

one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left  file,  by  the 
means  already  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  com- 
panies will  be  marched  by  the  flank ;  and  as  soon 
as  the  last  file  of  the  company,  next  towards  the 
direction,  shall  have  taken  its  interval,  it  will  be 
moved  upon  the  line  established  by  the  fifth  and 
sixth  companies,  halted,  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  sup- 
posed that  the  battalion  was  in  order  of  battle ; 
but  if  in  column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to 
the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  ma.de/orward, 
the  directing  company,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked, 
will  be  moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on 
the  file  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies 
will  take  its  interval  to  the  right  or  left,  and  de- 
ploy as  soon  as  it  is  taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the 
flank,  the  directing  company  will  be  moved  in  the 
same  manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  un- 
masked, and  will  then  be  halted  and  deployed  by 
the  flank  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of  the  other 
companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank,  and 
when  its  interval  is  taken,  will  be  moved  on  the 
line,  halted,  and  deployed  as  soon  as  the  company 
next  towards  the  direction  shall  have  finished  its 
deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves 
in  echellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event 
of  a  rally,  be  able  to  protect  themselves  without 
injuring  each  other ;  and  the  reserves  of  two  con- 
tiguous companies  have  been  united,  in  order  to 


212         INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

diminish  the  number  of  the  echellons,  and  to  in- 
crease their  capacity  for  resisting  cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  de- 
scend from  right  to  left,  but  they  may,  on  an  indi- 
cation from  the  colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted 
on  the  same  principle,  so  as  to  descend  from  left 
to  right. 

196.  When  the  color-company  is  to  be  deployed 
as  skirmishers,  the  color,  without  its  guard,  will 
be  detached,  and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various 
movements  prescribed  for  a  company,  to  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  battalion,  .1  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  the  same  signals.  When  he  wishes 
to  rally  the  battalion,  Le  will  cause  the  rally  on 
the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will  so  dispose 
his  reserve  as  to  protect  this  movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers 
will  be  rallied  in  squares  on  their  respective  re- 
serves ;  each  reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies 
will  form  the  first  front  of  the  square,  throwing  to 
the  rear  the  sections  on  the  flanks;  the  skir- 
mishers who  arrive  first  will  complete  the  lateral 
fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth  front.  The  officers 
and  sergeants  will  superintend  the  rally,  and  as 
fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form  them  into 
two  ranks,  without  regard  to  height,  and  cause 
them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders 
of  squares  will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time 
the  cavalry  may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety, 


" 

INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS.         213 

either  by  marching  "upon  the  battalion-reserve,  or 
by  seizing  an  advantageous  position ;  to  this  end, 
each  of  the  squares  will  be  formed  into  column, 
and  march  in  this  order ;  and  if  threatened  anew, 
it  will  halt,  and  again  form  itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near 
the  battalion-reserve,  each  will  re-form  as  promptly 
as  possible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or 
number,  take  place  jn  the  column  next  in  rear  of 
the  companies  already  in  it. 

201 .  The  battalion-reserve  will  also  form  square, 
if  itself  threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,  the 
companies  in  marching  towards  it  will  place  them- 
selves promptly  in  the  sectors  without  fire,  and 
thus  march  on  the  squares. 


END   OF   INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 


214  SWORD    MANUAL,  ETC. 


MANUAL  OF  THE   SWORD  OR  SABRE, 
FOR  OFFICERS. 


POSITION  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 

The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which 
will  be  supported  against  the  right  hip,  the  back 
of  the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

TO    SALUTE   WITH   THE    SWORD    OR    SABRE. 

TJiree  times,  (or  pauses.) 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  per- 
son to  be  saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpen- 
dicularly, the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  oppo- 
site to  the  right  eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  elbow  supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by 
extending  the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be 
brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain 
in  that  position  until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute 
is  rendered  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed, 
six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and 
place  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  right 
shoulder. 


COLOR-SALUTE,  ETC.  215 


COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a 
halt  or  in  march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the 
color-lance  supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right 
hand  generally  placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height 
of  the  shoulder,  to  hold  it  steady.  When  the  color 
has  to  render  honors,  the  color-bearer  will  salute 
as  follows : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand 
along  the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye;  lower  the 
lance  by  straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent, 
the  heel  of  the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and 
bring  back  the  lance  to  the  habitual  position  when 
the  person  saluted  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have 
passed,  six  paces. 


MANUAL 

FOR   RELIEVING    SENTINELS. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the 
lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  in- 
stant witn  both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the 


216  RELIEVING   SENTINELS. 

left  at  the  lower  band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing 
towards  the  muzzle,  the  barrel  sloping  upwards 
and  crossing  opposite  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder, 
the  butt  proportionally  lowered.  The  palm  of  the 
right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of  the  left  under 
the  piece,  the  nails  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body, 
to  which  the  elbows  will  be  closed. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

{First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the 
right  shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

{Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly 
by  the  side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms, 
if  it  be  wished  to  give  the  men  rest,  the  com- 
mand will  be : 

Parade — Rest. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel 
of  the  butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  body ;  seize  it  at  the 
same  time  with  the  left  hand  just  above,  and 
with  the  right  at  the  upper  band;  carry  the 
right  foot  six  inches  to  the  rear,  the  left  knee 
slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC.   217 

.     INSTRUCTION 

FOR   THE    CHIEF   BUGLER  AND   DRUM    MAJOR. 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  have 
been  given,  Title  I.,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column  in  manoeuvre,  the  field  music  and 
band  will  march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  com- 
pany, and  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passage 
of  defiles  to  the  front,  or  in  retreat,  they  will 
march  at  the  head  of  their  respective  battalions. 

GENERAL  CALLS. 

1.  Attention. 

2.  The  general. 

3.  The  assembly. 

4.  To  the  color. 

5.  The  recall. 

6.  Quick  time. 

7.  Double  quick  time. 

8.  The  charge.  - 

9.  The  reveille. 

10.  Retreat. 

11.  Tattoo. 

12.  To  extinguish  lights.       » 

13.  Assembly  of  the  buglers. 

14.  Assembly  of  the  guard. 

15.  Order's  for  orderly  sergeants. 


218    INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC. 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  places 

in  line  after  firing. 

17.  The  disperse. 

18.  Officers'  call. 

19.  Breakfast  call. 

20.  Dinner  call. 

21.  Sick  call. 

22.  Fatigue  call. 

23.  Church  call. 

24.  Drill  call. 

25.  School  call. 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  Fix  bayonet. 

2.  Unfix  bayonet. 

3.  Quick  time. 

4.  Double  quick  time.        ». 

5.  The  run. 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers. 

7.  Forward. 

8.  In  retreat. 

9.  Rait. 

10.  J5y  the  right  flank 

11.  i?y  the  left  flank. 

12.  Commence  firing. 

13.  Cease  firing. 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right. 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 

16.  .Lie  down. 

17.  i??'se  mjo. 

18.  Rally  by  fours. 

19.  Rally  by  sections. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC.    219 

20.  Rally  by  platoons. 

21.  Rally  on  the  reserve. 

22.  Rally  on  the  battalion. 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion. 

Note. — When  the  whole  of  the  troops  in  the 
same  camp  or  garrison  are  to  depart,  the  general, 
the  assembly,  and  to  the  color,  will  be  beaten  or 
sounded,  at  the  proper  intervals,  in  the  order 
here  mentioned.  At  the  first,  the  troops  will 
prepare  for  the  movement ;  at  the  second,  they 
will  form  by  company,  and  at  the  third  unite  by 
battalion. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SIGNS. 


MOVEMENT  OF  THE  METRONOME. 

=  ^  —  it  4  —  or  76  steps  to  the  njinute. 


76 


80 


or  80  bars  to  the  minute. 


or  100  steps  to  the  minute. 


120  =m  —  3t  2  —  or  120  steps  to  the  minute. 


Silence  •    •  p»  —  Demi-silence  •    •  "* 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


1.— ATTENTION. 

120  ==  J  Allegro. 


mm 


(221) 


222 


GENERAL    CALLS. 
2.— THE   GENERAL. 


130  =  J  Presto. 

>     >   _  >   _  > 


3.— THE  ASSEMBLY. 

80  =  J  Andante. 


sum 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


223 


4.— TO  THE  COLOR. 


=  A  Andante. 


5.— THE   RECALL. 

80  =  J  Andante. 

-rm  rm- 


^— =* 


3K 


□HOE 


S^eSe^ 


~v~ 


i 


i 


6.— QUICK   TIME. 

110  =^J  Allegro. 


w 


H§^ 


224 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


ffiEimjfaft 


7.— DOUBLE   QUICK  TIME. 

165  =  J  Allegro. 


w- 


GENERAL    CALLS. 

^F5 


225 


^^3EB?S 


D.C. 


8.— THE   CHARGE. 

115  ==  J  Allegro, 


mmt 


iSSsSm 


agggBaai^i 


M 


jtojt: 


JfZM 


— ,— n r 


FES= 


g=E 


F 


:S 


?=2=3=3 


zj^: 


*- 1        i 


D.C. 

m 


226 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


9.— THE  REVEILLE. 

110  =  J.  Allegro. 


5C~£ 


^Wu--£ 


#/->  W 


mmizmm 


^^gi 


*  m  *  * 


B.C. 


10.— RETREAT. 

76  —  J  Andante. 


3 


1    I 


£E?2? 


yy 


22* 


^^ 


. 


m 


m 


~=^ 


§ 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


227* 


11.— TATTOO. 
112  =  j.  Allegro. 


BteTOCiatE^g 


s 


^Ef 


P^SIfH 


S- 


*--r~* 


m 


0 


E: 


fe^E^^Si^ 


^^@^ 


2 


^ 


i  i 


:15 


•>228 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


12.— TO   EXTINGUISH   LIGHTS. 

76  =  J  Allegro. 


mS 


#• 


i 


msm: 


f= 


stt 


^ 


'• 


"S 


i 


13.— ASSEMBLY  OF   THE   BUGLERS. 

160  =  J  Presto. 

1F^ 


\ 


SiSS 


#  -# 


s 


a 


14.— ASSEMBLY  OF  THE   GUARD. 


112  =  J  Allegro. 


2_; 


a^ 


r      r 


3* 


I 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


229 


337 


^m 


W 


n 


15.— ORDERS  FOR  ORDERLY  SERGEANTS. 

72  =  J  Allegro. 


fef 


K 


^PSiP^ 


16.— FOR   OFFICERS    TO    TAKE    THEIR    PLACES 
IN    LINE    AFTER    FIRING. 


108  =  J.  Allegro. 


mm 


33 


i 


17.— THE   DISPERSE. 

120  =  J  Allegro. 


230 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


=3: 


-^r- 


Q» 


m^tm 


i 


18.— OFFICERS'    CALL. 

152  =  J  Allegro.  ' 


&E 


m   0-W 


SSfe: 


i 


o  #•»    ~l     W 


fete^pEB 


sag 


19.— BREAKFAST    CALL 

138  =  J  ^4%ro. 


*g 


• # 


i 


F 


~-fri 


fe 


— prri  pri  — r  4 


# 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


231 


20.— DINNER   CALL. 

110  =  J  Allegro. 


i]plg|pEgi 


21.— SICK   CALL. 
110  =  J  Allegro. 


^ 


S3 


s=w 


n- 


j^fej 


22.— FATIGUE  CALL. 

92  =  J  Allegro. 


H^ 


232 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


/ N     1    I     0       '    0 

iS3 


'  ixf       v 


3E 


5 


mmm 


80 


23.— CHURCH   CALL. 

Andante. 


i 


-3: 


3 


5 


i 


-jirgr?-  -J 


E 


eHI 


1 


=5t=st 


=i=-# 


i 


s? 


24.— DKILL   CALL. 

76  =  ^J  Maestoso. 


-4-£ 


f3 


B= 


=S2 


^ma 


GENERAL    CALLS. 


233 


S^i 


m 


■4- 


=P=it 


±rL 


S 


St 


4r 


p^s^ai 


25.— SCHOOL  CALL. 

110  =  J  Allegro. 


m 


» 


B=it^ 


^f 


CALLS   FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 


1.— FIX  BAYONET. 


-9- 


3E? 


f- 


® 


$ 


P#E§3ffi 


2.— UNFIX  BAYONET. 


80  =  ^  Andante. 


mi 


a-   9 


m 


3.— QUICK  TIME. 


(Music  the  same  as  in  "General  Calls.") 
(234) 


CALLS    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  235 

4.— DOUBLE   QUICK   TIME. 

165  =  J  Allegro. 


g^gjffg 


i~gi     0       H~rn 


"J^« 


D.  C. 


rgLi — i — i — nr 


» 


^ 


i 


5.— THE    RUN. 


160  ===  J  Presto. 


i 


W-FB- 


« 


~wm  0  m~ 


ift~w 


0    0    0 


£xzz 


i 


236 


CALLS    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


6.— DEPLOY  AS   SKIRMISHERS. 

110  =  J  Allegro. 

W~9~W 


~(x~# 


h& 


fJg^B 


i^tN 


« « 


7.— FORWARD. 


160  =  J  Pmto. 


Ei 


^ 


=ft=3=3= 


^— * 


g     * 


L__L 


3=2=4?=3 


c: 


^L=^ 


JZZ#. 


D.C. 

I 


Si 


jSTl       ET 


^ 


^— ^ —^ 


8.— IN   RETREAT. 

76  =  J  Allegro. 


Stefl 


"£3T 


I 


3^3 


S3 


m 


IZOI 


~g~ip~ 


E 


sw 


3 


CALLS   FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 


237 


9.— HALT. 


160  =  J  Presto. 


mmmm 


10.—  BY   THE   RIGHT   FLANK. 

160  =  J  Presto. 


rog 


11.— BY   THE   LEFT   FLANK. 

160  =  J  iVcsto. 


FF 


Wzrirjrj 


l=te 


12.— COMMENCE   FIRING. 

160  =  J  Presto. 


a 


3 


i 


23S 


CALLS    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


13.— CEASE    FIRING. 

50  =  J  Maestoso. 


i_ 


14.— CHANGE   DIRECTION    TO   THE   RIGHT. 

110  =  J  Allegro. 


is* 


mm^m 


IjOZ] 


Efe 


:n 


JS 


m 


15.— CHANGE   DIRECTION   TO   THE   LEFT. 
110  =  J  Allegro. 


m 

* 


m 


3 


'M 


-S 4 


g^fgE 


^' 


i 


50 


=  JM 

i 

odera 
•_• 

6.- 

to. 

-LIE   DC 

rw 

#          u 

F®^ 

—m 

1 

— 

=£=# 

50  = 


CALLS   FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 
17.— RISE    UP. 

Moderate, 


y~^ 


^tj—sl 


239 


i 


18.— RALLY  BY  FOURS. 
130  =  J  Allegro. 


fi 


h&£B 


10.— RALLY   BY   SECTIONS. 

132  =  J  Allegro. 


i^^sfe^fe 


-^i- 


ir1? 


q£4^p 


20.— RALLY  BY  PLATOONS. 

110  =  J  ^l%ro. 


ggse 


gg^gfegi 


240 


CAXLS    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


21.— RALLY  ON   THE   RESERVE. 

76  =  J  Andante. 


WF 


tfi* 


+- 


^J^ 


SEZZ^ZJEIZ 


"N, zz 


"N 


e£ 


ii 


22.— RALLY   ON   THE   BATTALION. 


76  =  J  Andante. 


J 


^?£_£.l 


:5.tc 


<G   0-0  0'0  0~'0  0-0 


23.— ASSEMBLE   ON   THE   BATTALION. 

80  =  J  Andante. 


iZ3 


&—r 


'0~fTj 


a 


s? 


0   0   0   W~W 


£ 


— r^ — r*1   1 1  —     ir 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 
Vol.  I. 


TITLE    FIRST. 
Article  First. 


PAGE 


Formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in 

line  5 

Posts  of  company  officers,  sergeants,  and  corporals.  7 

Posts  of  field  officers  and  regimental  staff. 8 

Posts  of  field  music  and  band 9 

Color-guard 9 

General  guides 10 

Article  Second. 

Instruction  of  the  battalion 11 

Instruction  of  officers , 13 

Instruction  of  sergeants 14 

Instruction  of  corporals 14 

Commands 15 

(241) 


242  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 

TITLE  SECOND.  m 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER  * 

PART    FIRST. 

PAGE 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 
soldier 16 

Lesson  I. — Position  of  the  soldier  (No.  78  )  Eyes 
right,  left,  and  front  (Nos.  80,  83.) 18 

Lesson  IT.— Facings  (Nos.  88,  91.) 23 

Lesson  III. — Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  com- 
mon and  quick  time  (Nos.  94,  102) 24 

Lesson  IV. — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step 
(No.  104) 26 

PART   SECOND. 

General  rules 28 

Lesson  I, — Principles  of  shouldered  arms 29 

Lesson  II. — Manual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No. 
133.)  Present  arms  (No.  143.)  Order  arms 
(No.  147.)  Position  of  order  arms  (No.  149.) 
Load  in  nine  times  (No.  156.)  Ready  (No. 
171.)  Aim  (No.  174.)  Fire  (No.  177.)  Fix 
bayonet  (No.  188.)     Charge  bayonet  (No.  193.) 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  243 

PAGE 

Trail  arms  (No.  197.)  Unfix  bayonet  (No.  200. ) 
Secure  arms  (No.  204.)  Right  shoulder  shift 
arms  (No.  210.)  Arms  at  will  (No.  219.) 
Ground  arms  (No.  222.)  Inspection  arms  (No. 
227.)  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms  (No. 
237.)  Mark  time  (No.  241.)  Change  step  (No. 
245.)     March  backwards  (No.  247.) 30 

Lesson  III. — Load  in  four  times  (No.  250.)  Load 
at  will  (No.  257.) 5G 

Lesson  IV.  —  Firings.  Direct  fire  (No.  2G1.) 
Oblique  firings  (No.  266. )  Position  of  the  two 
ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to  the  right  (No.  267.) 
Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to 
the  left  (No.  270.)  Fire  by  file  (No.  275.)  Fire 
by  rank  (No.  285.) 57 

Lesson  V. — Fire  and  load  kneeling  (No.  292.) 
Fire  and  load  lying  (No.  300.) 62 

Lesson  VI. — Bayonet  exercise 65 

PART    THIRD. 

Lesson  I. — Alignments 67 

Lesson  II.— March  by  the  front  (No.  325.)  March 
by  the  front  in  double  quick  time  (No.  334.) 
Face  about  in  marching  (No.  343.)  March  back- 
wards (No.  315.) 70 

Lesson  III. — March  by  the  flank  (No.  351.)  March 
by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time  (No.  368.) 76 


244  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Lesson  IV. — General  principles  of  wheeling  (No. 
377.)  Wheeling  from  a  halt  (No.  383.)  Wheel- 
ing in  marching  (No.  393.)  Turning  (No.  400.) 
Wheeling  and  turning  in  double  quick  time  (No. 
403.) 80 

Lesson  V. — Long  marches  in  double  quick  time 
and  the  run  (No.  406.)  Stack  arms  (No.  410.) 
Take  arms  (No.  413.) 87 


TITLE  THIRD. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 
company 90 

Lesson  First. 

Article  I. —  To  open  ranks  (No.  8.) 93 

Article  II. — Alignments  in  open  ranks  (No.  18.)  95 

^Article  III.— "Manual  of  arms  (No.  26.) 97 

Article  IV.— To  close  ranks  (No.  28.) 98 

Article  V. — Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in 

closed  ranks  (No.  30.) 98 


TABLE    OF   CONTENTS.  245 

Lesson  Second. 


page 


Article  I—  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will  (No 

44J .'100 

Article  II.— To  fire  by  company  (No.  48) 101 

Article  III._To  fire  by  file  (No.  65) i02 

Article  IV.— To  fire  by  rank  (No.  58) 103 

Article  V.-To  fire  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  G8) 105 


Lesson  Third. 

Article  I.— To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  84)..  108 
Article  II.— To  halt  the  company,  marching  in 

line'of  battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  99) HI 

Article  III.— Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No 

101) .'ill 

Article  IV.-To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double 

quick  time,  and  the  back  step  (No.  109) 113 

Article  V.— To  march  in  retreat  (No.  119) 115 

Lesson  Fourth. 

Article  L— To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  135) 118 

Article  II.— Jo  change  direction  by  file  (No.  142)  120 
Article  III.-To  halt  the  company,  marching  by 
the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  145)...  121 


246  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Article  IV. — The  company  being  in  march  by  the 
flank,  to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into 
line  of  battle  (No.  148) 121 

Article  V. — The  company  marching  by  the  flank, 
to  form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching 
(No.  153) 123 

Lesson  Fifth. 

Article  I. — To   break  into  column  by  platoon, 

either  at  a  halt,  or  marching  (No.  171) 127 

Article  II. — To  march  in  column  (No.  195) 132 

Article  III. — To  change  direction  (No.  211) 135 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  231) :.  140 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 
to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at 
a  halt,  or  marching  (No.  235) 140 

Lesson  Sixth. 

Article  I. — To  break  the  company  into  platoons, 
and  to  re-form  the  company  (No.  265) 146 

Article  II. — To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to 
cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line  (No.  289) 150 

Article  III. — To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to 
execute  the  movements  incident  thereto  (No.  306)  154 

Article  IV.— Countermarch  (No.  334) 160 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.  247 


PAGE 


Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 

on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  343)..  162 
Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 

rank,  and  reciprocally  (No.  359) 165 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four, 

and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  marching  (No. 

371) 167 


INSTRUCTION 
FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction..  171 

Article  First. 

Deployments  (No.  15.)  Deploy  forward  (No.  22.) 
Deploy  by  the  flank  (No.  37.)  Extend  intervals 
(No.  51.)  Close  intervals  (No.  59.)  Relieve 
skirmishers  (No.  66) 174 

Article  Second. 

March  to  the  front  (No.  71.)  March  in  retreat 
(No.  79.)  Change  direction  (No.  86.)  March 
by  the  flank  (No.  96) 186 


248  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


Article  Third. 

PAGE 

Firings  (No.  106.)  Fire  at  a  halt  (No.  107.)  Fire 
marching  (No.  111.)     Observations  (No.  120)...  191 

Article  Fourth. 

Rally  (No.  127.)  Bally  by  sections  (No.  132.) 
Rally  by  platoons  (No.  137.)  Rally  on  the  re- 
serve (No.  139.)  Form  column  (No.  143.)  Rally 
on  the  battalion  (No.  161.)  Assemble  on  the 
reserve  (No.  171.)  Assemble  on  the  centre  (No. 
174) 197 

Article  Fifth. 

Deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers  (No.  178.) 
Observations  (No.  194.)     Rally  (No.  197) 208 


Manual  of  the  sabre  for  officers , 214 

Salute  of  the  color 215 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels 215 

Instruction  for  parade  rest 216 

Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  etc 217 

General  calls 217 

Calls  for  skirmishers 218 


TABLE    OF   CONTENTS.  249 

MUSIC. 
GENERAL    CALLS. 

PAGE 

1.  Attention 221 

2.  The  general 222 

3.  The  assembly 222 

4.  To  the  color 223 

5.  The  recall 223 

6.  Quick  time 223 

7.  Double  quick  time 22-1 

8.  The  charge 225 

9.  The  reveille* 22(3 

10.  Retreat 226 

11.  Tattoo 227 

12.  To  extinguish  lights 228 

13.  Assembly  of  the  buglers 228 

14.  Assembly  of  the  guard 228 

15.  Orders  for  orderly  sergeants 229 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  places  in  line  after  firing  229 

17.  The  disperse 229 

18.  Officers'  call 230 

19.  Breakfast  call "230 

20.  Dinner  call 231 

21.  Sick  call 231 

22.  Fatigue  call 231 

23.  Church  call 232 

24.  Drill  call 232 

25.  School  call 233 


250  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 


CALLS   FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

PAGE 

1.  Fix  bayonet 234 

2.  Unfix  bayonet \ 234 

3.  Quick  time 234 

4.  Double  quick  time 235 

5.  The  run 235 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers 236 

7.  Forward 236 

8.  In  retreat.... 236 

9.  Halt 237 

10.  By  the  right  flank 237 

11.  By  the  left  flank 237 

12.  Commence  firing 237 

13.  Cease  firing 238 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right 238 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left 238 

16.  Lie  down 238 

17.  Rise  up 239 

18.  Rally  by  fours 239 

19.  Rally  by  sections 239 

20.  Rally  by  platoons 239 

21.  Rally  on  the  reserve 240 

22.  Rally  on  the  battalion 240 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion 240 

>    .  END   OF  VOL.   I. 


••  ■  '■,  i 

I 


. 


. 


